Professional Documents
Culture Documents
V100R002C00
Issue 06
Date 2010-07-30
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Intended Audience
This document describes how to configure various services on the equipment. This document
describes the basic information and configuration process, and uses configuration examples to
show how to set specific parameters.
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Symbol Description
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
Section Description
Section Description
Section Description
4.1.4 TDM Timeslot Planning Schemes Added meanings of the timeslot allocation
diagram and timeslot planning principles.
8 Adding and Modifying Configuration Added common tasks for supplementing and
Data adjusting initial configuration data.
Compared with the second release, the updated contents are as follows:
Section Description
Section Description
Section Description
Contents
A Task Collection.........................................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Managing NEs...............................................................................................................................................A-3
A.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method..........................................................................................A-3
B Parameters Description............................................................................................................B-1
B.1 Parameters for NE Management....................................................................................................................B-2
B.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching..................................................................................................B-2
B.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation....................................................................................................B-6
B.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs...........................................................................B-9
B.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization.............................................................................B-10
B.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time...................................................B-12
B.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management..................................................................B-14
B.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management....................................................................................B-15
B.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs..............................................B-16
B.2 Parameters for Cable Management..............................................................................................................B-16
B.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search..................................................................................................B-17
B.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation...............................................................................................B-18
B.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation......................................................................................B-20
B.3 Parameters for Communications Management............................................................................................B-21
B.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting.........................................................B-22
B.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration...............................................B-23
B.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management..............B-25
B.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC.........................................B-27
C Glossary......................................................................................................................................C-1
C.1 0-9..................................................................................................................................................................C-2
C.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................C-2
C.3 F-J..................................................................................................................................................................C-7
C.4 K-O..............................................................................................................................................................C-10
C.5 P-T................................................................................................................................................................C-12
C.6 U-Z...............................................................................................................................................................C-16
Figures
Figure 6-7 Clock synchronization policy for a port aggregation network (aggregation only through the tributary
port).....................................................................................................................................................................6-10
Figure 6-8 Tributary retiming.............................................................................................................................6-11
Figure 6-9 Configuration flow chart (clocks).....................................................................................................6-12
Figure 6-10 Networking diagram (clocks on a TDM radio chain network).......................................................6-15
Figure 6-11 Clock source information (TDM radio chain network)..................................................................6-17
Figure 6-12 Networking diagram (clocks on a TDM radio ring network).........................................................6-18
Figure 6-13 Clock source information (TDM radio ring network)....................................................................6-20
Figure 6-14 Networking diagram (clocks on a Hybrid radio chain network)....................................................6-22
Figure 6-15 Networking diagram (clock for a Hybrid radio chain network).....................................................6-24
Figure 6-16 Networking diagram (clocks on a Hybrid radio ring network)......................................................6-26
Figure 6-17 Clock source information (Hybrid radio ring network)..................................................................6-27
Figure 7-1 Circuits for the input external alarms.................................................................................................7-4
Figure 7-2 Networking diagram (orderwire)........................................................................................................7-5
Figure 7-3 Networking diagram (for orderwire)..................................................................................................7-7
Figure 7-4 Networking diagram (synchronous data services)..............................................................................7-9
Figure 7-5 Networking diagram (asynchronous data services)..........................................................................7-13
Figure 7-6 Networking diagram (wayside E1 services).....................................................................................7-16
Figure 7-7 Networking diagram (external alarms).............................................................................................7-18
Figure A-1 Networking diagram for testing the Ethernet service.....................................................................A-90
Figure A-2 Configuration for testing the IF 1+1 switching............................................................................A-158
Figure A-3 Configuration for testing the N+1 protection...............................................................................A-161
Figure A-4 Configuration for testing the SNCP switching.............................................................................A-164
Figure A-5 Configuration for testing the ERPS..............................................................................................A-168
Figure A-6 Configuration for testing the Ethernet service..............................................................................A-170
Tables
1 Configuration Preparations
Before configuring the NE data, you must make the required preparations.
Documents
l Network planning documents, such as the XXX Network Planning
l OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Configuration Guide
Tools
l A computer where the U2000 server software is installed
l A computer where the U2000 client software is installed
NOTE
For information about the software and hardware required for the U2000 and the installation method, see the
documents that accompany the U2000.
Initial Configuration
Initial configuration of a radio network refers to configuring the network-wide service data by
using the U2000 for the first time after the NE commissioning is complete. Table 1-1 describes
the configuration procedure.
Network Adjustment
Network adjustment involves adding and adjusting configuration data in the equipment
commissioning and operation phases. You can find the corresponding configuration operations
according to the actual network adjustment requirements in Table 1-2.
8.1 Common Task Collection (Network This common task collection lists
Topology) configuration operations associated with NE
attributes, including changing the ID and IP
address of an NE.
8.2 Common Task Collection (Radio This common task collection lists
Links) configuration operations associated with
radio links, including changing the working
mode of a TDM radio link and changing the
number of E1s on a Hybrid radio link.
8.3 Common Task Collection (TDM This common task collection lists
Services) configuration operations associated with
TDM services, including deleting TDM
services and upgrading a normal service to an
SNCP service.
Operation Description
8.4 Common Task Collection (Ethernet This common task collection lists
Services) configuration operations associated with
Ethernet services, including configuring or
modifying Ethernet interface parameters and
deleting Ethernet services.
You can manage a transport network by using the U2000 only after configuring the network
topology on the network.
2.1.1 DCN
To manage and maintain an NE, the U2000 needs to communicate with the NE through the data
communication network (DCN).
2.1.2 GNE and Non-GNE
The gateway NE (GNE) refers to the NE whose application layer communicates directly with
the application layer of the NMS. A non-GNE refers to an NE whose application layer
communicates with the application layer of the NMS by forwarding data through the application
layer of its GNE.
2.1.3 ID and IP Address of an NE
The ID and IP address are the unique identifiers of an NE on the DCN.
2.1.4 Physical Boards and Logical Boards
The NE software considers a physical board as one or more logical boards when managing the
physical board. The U2000 also considers a physical board as one or more logical boards when
managing the physical board.
2.1.5 Fiber/Cable Types
You can obtain the clear fiber/cable connection relations between NEs by using the fiber
management function of the U2000. You can manage the fibers and cables by using the
U2000, including SDH fibers, radio links, extended ECC cables, and back-to-back radio
connections.
2.1.6 Subnet
NEs in a same domain or with similar attributes can be allocated to a same subnet. In this way,
they can be displayed as a whole on the U2000, thus facilitating the NE management.
2.1.1 DCN
To manage and maintain an NE, the U2000 needs to communicate with the NE through the data
communication network (DCN).
On a DCN, the U2000 and all the NEs are considered as nodes on the DCN. The DCN between
the U2000 and all the NEs is considered as the external DCN, and the DCN between the NEs is
considered as the internal DCN. The OptiX RTN 910 supports several DCN solutions, including
HWECC, IP over DCC, and inband DCN. HWECC is the commonest DCN solution.
HWECC is the default DCN solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910. In the case of HWECC,
the network management (NM) message is encapsulated in the proprietary HWECC protocol
stack. Hence, the HWECC solution is easy to configure. As a proprietary protocol stack,
however, HWECC can be used only when there is one isolated OptiX RTN 910 NE or when the
OptiX RTN 910 NE networks with other OptiX equipment that supports HWECC.
Figure 2-1 shows how the NM message is transmitted when HWECC is used. The NM message
encapsulated in the HWECC protocol stack can be transmitted on the DCC channels over the
optical fiber or microwave, and can also be transmitted over the Ethernet between the Ethernet
NM ports or between the NE cascade ports. If there are no fiber connections or radio links
between two NEs, ensure that the Ethernet connection is set up between the corresponding
Ethernet NM ports or NE cascade ports on the NEs. Otherwise, the communication between the
two NEs fails. The Ethernet connection between the corresponding Ethernet NM ports or NE
cascade ports functions as the extended channel for transmitting the HWECC protocol stack and
is hence considered as the extended ECC. The extended ECC function is enabled by default.
Message
HWECC
DCC
NMS
Message Message
HWECC HWECC
DCC DCC
OptiX radio
OptiX optical transmission equipment
transmission equipment
In addition, the inband DCN is enabled by default. In the inband DCN solution, the NM
management message occupies part of the Ethernet service bandwidth and is transmitted over
Hybrid radio link or through FE/GE ports. The inband DCN solution applies to the scenarios
where the OptiX RTN 910 networks OptiX packet switching equipment, as shown in Figure
2-2.
OptiX Msg
IP stack
NMS
Hybrid MW
OptiX Msg
IP stack
ETH OptiX Msg
IP stack
Inband DCN OptiX Msg
IP stack
FE/GE
In the inband DCN solution, the NM management message occupies part of the Ethernet service
bandwidth. Hence, the DCN function of the ports that are not connected to the OptiX packet
switching equipment must be disabled.
GNE
Generally, the GNE is connected to the NMS through a LAN/WAN. The application layer of
the NMS can directly communicate with the application layer of the GNE. One set of NMS
needs to be connected to one or more GNEs.
Disable the extended ECC function of the GNEs, to prevent oversized DCN that is caused due
to the ECC communication between the GNEs.
Non-GNE
A non-GNE communicates with the GNE through the DCN channels between NEs. It is
recommended that fewer than 50 GNEs are affiliated to a GNE.
ID of an NE
At the application layer of each DCN solution, the OptiX NE uses the NE ID as the address of
the NE. Hence, the ID of each NE on the DCN must be unique and complies with the uniform
DCN planning.
The NE ID has 24 bits. The highest eight bits represent the subnet ID (or the extended ID) and
the lowest 16 bits represent the basic ID. For example, if the ID of an NE is 0x090001, the subnet
ID of the NE is 9 and the basic ID is 1.
IP Address of an NE
An NE uses the IP address as its unique identifier during the TCP/IP communication.
In the HWECC solution, the IP addresses of the NEs on the DCN are used in the following
scenarios:
l The GNE communicates with the U2000 over TCP/IP based on the IP address. The IP
address must comply with the uniform planning of the external DCN.
l Different NEs communicate with each other over extended ECC channels based on the IP
addresses. The IP addresses of the NEs must be within the same network segment. By
default, the IP address of an NE is within the 129.9.0.0 network segment.
In the DCN solutions (for example, inband DCN) where the NM message is transmitted over
TCP/IP, the IP address of an NE is used as the NE address at the network layer. Hence, the IP
of each NE on the DCN must be unique and complies with the uniform planning of the DCN.
By default, that is, if the IP address of an NE is not changed manually, the IP address and ID of
the NE interlock each other. That is, when the NE ID is changed, the IP address is automatically
modified to 0x81000000 + ID. For example, when the NE ID is changed to 0x090001, the IP
address is automatically changed to 129.9.0.1. After the IP address is changed manually, the
interlocking relation between the ID and IP address fails.
Table 2-1 Mapping relations between the physical boards and logical boards
Physical Board Logical Board
Fibers and cables are topological objects on the U2000. Hence, operations on the fibers or cables do not affect
the normal running of the NEs.
2.1.6 Subnet
NEs in a same domain or with similar attributes can be allocated to a same subnet. In this way,
they can be displayed as a whole on the U2000, thus facilitating the NE management.
The subnets are topological objects on the U2000. Hence, operations on the subnets do not affect
the normal running of the NEs. In the case of a large number of topological objects, subnets that
contain multiple NEs simplify the topology view on the U2000.
2 A.2.1 Uploading the If you select Upload after create during A.1.1
NE Data Creating NEs by Using the Search Method, skip
this operation.
7 A.6.3 Configuring the Required in the case of the GNE. Set the parameters
Extended ECC as follows:
l Set ECC Extended Mode to Specified Mode.
l Adopt the default values for the other parameters.
NOTE
This operation is performed to disable the automatic
extended ECC function of the GNE.
9 A.6.11 Configuring the Required in the case of the Hybrid radio network. Set
Enable Status of the the parameters as follows:
Inband DCN Function l In the case of the Ethernet ports and microwave
on Ports ports that interconnect with the packet switching
equipment, set Enabled Status to Enabled.
l In the case of the other ports, set Enabled
Status to Disabled.
14 A.4.5 Creating a Back- Optional when there are cascading NEs on the
to-Back Radio network.
Connection
A.5.2 Optional.
Copying
Topology
Objects
A.5.3 Optional.
Moving
Topology
Objects
NOTE
l If the NE ID and NE name are changed in the NE commissioning process and if the NE communication
parameters, logical boards, VLAN ID and bandwidth of the inband DCN are set during the NE
commissioning, the configuration data is automatically synchronized onto the U2000 in the NE data
uploading process. Hence, you need not perform the corresponding operations in the initial configuration
process.
l The preceding configuration procedure is applicable to the scenarios wherein HWECC is used as the DCN
solution. When a DCN solution other than HWECC is used, the DCN-related operations described in the
preceding configuration procedure may be inapplicable.
BTS2
NE4
BTS3
NE3 NE2 NE1 BSC
BTS1
NE6 NE5
BTS5 BTS4
NOTE
The board configuration information provided in this configuration example also applies to the configuration
examples of radio links, TDM services, and Ethernet services.
E1 STM-1 E1
BTS3
BTS1 STM-1
BSC
BTS5 BTS4
NOTE
"NE cascade" indicates that an Ethernet cable is used to connect two NEs through the Ethernet NM ports or NE
cascading ports.
l The U2000 is connected to NE1 through the LAN. Hence, NE1 is the GNE and the other
NEs are non-GNEs, which access the U2000 through NE1.
l The chain network comprises only OptiX RTN 910. Hence, HWECC is preferred as the
DCN solution. In the HWECC solution, NE2 and NE3 communicate with each other
through the extended ECC that is enabled by default, because no fiber connections are set
up between NE2 and NE3. The other NEs communicate with each other through the DCC
channels over microwave.
l NE1 is the GNE. Hence, the extended ECC function of NE1 needs to be disabled.
l On this chain network, the OptiX RTN 910 does not interconnect with OptiX packet
switching equipment. Hence, the inband DCN function needs to be disabled for all the
Hybrid microwave ports and FE ports in the case of the Hybrid radio network.
l Figure 2-6 shows the ID and IP address that are allocated to each NE according to the
uniform DCN planning information.
9-4 10.0.0.100/16
129.9.0.4
0.0.0.0
NE4 9-3 9-2 9-1
129.9.0.3 129.9.0.2 10.0.0.1
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
NE3 NE2
9-5
9-6 129.9.0.5
129.9.0.6 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
NE5 Extended ID-Basic ID
NE6 IP address
Gatew ay
NOTE
Precautions
If the NE ID and the values of NE communication parameters are changed and the logical boards
are configured in the NE commissioning process, skip the operations.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method and create the NEs.
Parameter Value
NE User root
Password password
NOTE
In this configuration example, it is assumed that the IP address of the GNE is not changed manually and is not
known. Hence, you need to search for and create the NEs by using the 129.9.255.255 network segment as the
search domain. If the IP address of the GNE is known, it is recommended that you use the IP address of the
GNE as the search domain.
The icons of NE1 to NE6 should be displayed on the Main Topology and all the NE data should
be uploaded successfully.
Paramete Value
r
NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE5 NE6
New ID 1 2 3 4 5 6
Step 3 See A.6.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters and set the NE communication parameters.
Parameter Value
NE1
IP Address 10.0.0.1
Parameter Value
NE1
Extended ID 9
NOTE
The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE1, are in the interlocking relations with the NE IDs. Hence, you need
not change the values of the NE communication parameters manually.
Step 4 See A.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board and configure the logical boards.
Configure the logical boards according to the mapping relations between the physical boards
and logical boards.
Step 5 See A.6.3 Configuring the Extended ECC and configure the extended ECC.
Parameter Value
NE1
NOTE
This operation is performed to disable the automatic extended ECC function of NE1.
Step 6 In the case of the Hybrid radio network, see A.6.11 Configuring the Enable Status of the
Inband DCN Function on Ports and disable the inband DCN function of the port.
Parameter Value
Step 7 See A.1.6 Synchronizing the NE Time and synchronize the NE time.
Parameter Value
Synchronous Mode NM
Synchronization Period(days) 1
Step 8 See A.4.1 Creating an Optical Transmission Line or Radio Link by Using the Search
Method and create radio links or SDH fiber connections.
Normally, all the radio links or SDH fiber connections should be created successfully on the
Main Topology.
Step 9 When an Ethernet cable is used to connect NE2 and NE3 through the Ethernet NM ports or NE
cascading ports, see A.4.4 Creating an Extended ECC and create the extended ECC
connections.
Parameter Value
Source NE NE2
Sink NE NE3
Step 10 See A.4.5 Creating a Back-to-Back Radio Connection and create back-to-back radio
connections.
Parameter Value
Source NE NE2
Sink NE NE3
----End
The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring the NE data.
2.4.4 Configuration Process
This section describes the procedures for the data configuration.
NMS
NE1
BSC
BTS1
BTS2
NE3
BTS3
NOTE
The board configuration information provided in this configuration example also applies to the configuration
examples of radio links, TDM services, and Ethernet services.
Figure 2-8 Board configuration of NEs on the TDM radio ring network
BSC NE1
E1 IF1 IF1
CSTA
E1
NE2 NE4
BTS2 IF1 IF1
IF1 IF1 CSTA E1
CSTA
BTS4
E1
BTS3
NE3
IF1 IF1
CSTA
E1
BTS3
Figure 2-9 Board configuration of NEs on the Hybrid radio ring network
BSC NE1
E1+GE IFU2 IFU2
CSHA
E1+FE
NE2 NE4
BTS2 IFU2 IFU2
IFU2 IFU2 CSHA E1+FE
CSHA
BTS4
E1+FE
BTS3
NE3
IFU2 IFU2
CSHA
E1+FE
BTS3
l The OptiX RTN 910 is connected to NE1 through the LAN. Hence, NE1 is the GNE and
the other NEs are non-GNEs, which access the OptiX RTN 910 through NE1.
l The ring network comprises only OptiX RTN 910. Hence, HWECC is preferred as the DCN
solution. In the HWECC solution, the NEs communicate with each other through the DCC
channels over microwave.
l NE1 is the GNE. Hence, the extended ECC function of NE1 should be disabled.
l On this ring network, the OptiX RTN 910 does not interconnect with OptiX packet
switching equipment. Hence, the inband DCN function needs to be disabled for all the
Hybrid microwave ports and FE ports in the case of the Hybrid radio network.
l Figure 2-10 shows the ID and IP address that are allocated to each NE according to the
uniform DCN planning information.
10.0.0.100/16
9-1
10.0.0.1
0.0.0.0
NE1 9-4
9-2
129.9.0.2 129.9.0.4
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
NOTE
l The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE1, are in the interlocking relations with the NE IDs. Hence,
if the IP address of an NE (not NE1) is not changed manually, the NE automatically changes the IP
address to be the planned value after the NE ID is changed.
l In this example, the policy of synchronizing the NE with the NM server is used. The
automatic synchronization period is one day. The daylight saving time (DST) scheme is
not used at the local area.
l In this configuration example, no subnets need to be configured.
Precautions
If the NE ID and the values of NE communication parameters are changed and the logical boards
are configured in the NE commissioning process, skip the operations.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method and create the NEs.
Parameter Value
NE User root
Password password
NOTE
In this configuration example, it is assumed that the IP address of the GNE is not changed manually and the IP
addresses of the non-GNEs are not known. Hence, you need to search for and create the NEs by using the
129.9.255.255 network segment as the search domain. If the IP address of the GNE is known, it is recommended
that you use the IP address of the GNE as the search domain.
The icons of NE1 to NE4 should be displayed on the Main Topology and all the NE data should
be uploaded successfully.
Parameter Value
New ID 1 2 3 4
New Extended 9 (default value) 9 (default value) 9 (default value) 9 (default value)
ID
Step 3 See A.6.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters and set the NE communication parameters.
Parameter Value
NE1
IP Address 10.0.0.1
Parameter Value
NE1
Extended ID 9
NOTE
The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE1, are in the interlocking relations with the NE IDs. Hence, you need
not change the values of the NE communication parameters manually.
Step 4 See A.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board and configure logical boards.
Configure the logical boards according to the mapping relations between the physical boards
and logical boards.
Step 5 See A.6.3 Configuring the Extended ECC and configure the extended ECC.
Parameter Value
NE1
NOTE
This operation is performed to disable the automatic extended ECC function of NE1.
Step 6 In the case of the Hybrid radio network, see A.6.11 Configuring the Enable Status of the
Inband DCN Function on Ports and disable the inband DCN function of the port.
Parameter Value
Step 7 See A.1.6 Synchronizing the NE Time and synchronize the NE time.
Parameter Value
Synchronous Mode NM
Synchronization Period(days) 1
Step 8 See A.4.1 Creating an Optical Transmission Line or Radio Link by Using the Search
Method and create radio links or SDH fiber connections.
Normally, all the radio links or SDH fiber connections should be created successfully on the
Main Topology.
----End
Before configuring services on a radio link, you need to configure the radio link.
Figure 3-1 AM
256QAM
128QAM
32QAM
QPSK
32QAM
256QAM 128QAM
16QAM 64QAM
Channel
16QAM
capability
64QAM
E1 services
Ethernet
services
The AM technology adopted by the OptiX RTN 910 has the following features:
l The AM technology can use the QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, and
256QAM modulation mode.
l The lowest modulation mode (also called "reference mode") and the highest modulation
mode (also called "nominal mode") actually used by the AM can be configured.
l When the modulation modes of AM are switched, the transmit frequency, receive
frequency, and channel spacing do not change.
l When the modulation modes of AM are switched, the step-by-step switching mode is
adopted.
l AM switching is a hitless switch. When the AM scheme is downshifted, high-priority
services will not be affected due to the mode switching when the low-priority services are
discarded. The switching rate meets the requirement of the 100dB/s fast channel fading.
Therefore, the capacity in CCDP transmission mode is double the capacity in single-polarized
transmission mode.
The ideal situation of CCDP transmission is that no interference exists between the two
orthogonal signals that operate at the same frequency, and thus the receiver can easily recover
the two signals. In actual engineering conditions, however, regardless of the orthogonality of
the two signals, certain interference between the signals exists, due to cross-polarization
discrimination (XPD) of the antenna and channel degradation. To cancel the interference, the
XPIC technology is adopted. In the XPIC technology, the signals in the horizontal and vertical
directions are received and then processed. In this manner, the original signals are recovered.
The characteristics of the XPIC function supported by the OptiX RTN 910 are as follows:
l The XPD tolerance is increased, and the notch performance is improved.
l The XPIC function is realized completely through hardware.
XPIC Configuration
The XPIC adopts both the horizontally polarized wave and the vertically polarized wave over
one channel to transmit two channels of signals. The radio link capacity in the case of XPIC
configuration is double the radio link capacity in the case of 1+0 configuration.
The OptiX RTN 910 supports only the XPIC configuration for the Hybrid radio link.
Procedures for configuring TDM Procedures for configuring Hybrid radio Procedures for configuring Hybrid radio
radio links links (with the XPIC function used) links (with the XPIC function not used)
Required
End End
Optional
1 A.8.1 Required when the radio links are configured with 1+1
Creating an protection.
IF 1+1 Parameters are set according to the network planning
Protection information.
Groupa
3 A.8.8 Required when the radio links are configured with N+1
Creating an protection.
N+1 The N+1 protection groups of the equipment at both ends must
Protection have the same attributes.
Group
Parameters are set according to the network planning
information.
NOTE
l a: Generally, during the site commissioning, the previous steps are completed. After the site commissioning,
however, you need to reset ATPC Enable Status.
l In the case of radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information
on the main radio link only. In the case of radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need to configure the IF
and ODU information on the main radio link and the ODU information on the standby radio link.
l In the case of TDM radio links configured with N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF and ODU
information on each link. Work Mode must be configured as 7, STM-1, 28MHz, 128QAM.
Table 3-2 Configuration procedure of Hybrid radio links (the XPIC is used)
Step Operation Description
1 A.8.2 Required.
Creating an Parameters are set according to the network planning
XPIC information.
Protection
Group
2 A.8.3 Required.
Setting the Parameters are set according to the network planning
Hybrid/AM information. The parameters in both polarization directions
Attributes should take the same values.
of the XPIC
Hybrid
Radio Link
4 A.8.5 Required.
Setting IF When the XPIC function is enabled on the IFX2 board, set
Attributes XPIC Enabled to Enabled (default value).
NOTE
l The preceding parameters need to set to the same values, separately for the radio links in the vertical and
horizontal polarization directions.
l During the site commissioning, you can configure the two XPIC links as two separate non-XPIC link
according to Table 3-3.
Table 3-3 Configuration procedure of Hybrid radio links (the XPIC is not used)
Step Operation Description
1 A.8.1 Required when the radio links are configured with 1+1
Creating an protection.
IF 1+1 Parameters are set according to the network planning
Protection information.
Groupa
3 A.8.8 Required when the radio links are configured with N+1
Creating an protection.
N+1 The N+1 protection groups of the equipment at both ends must
Protection have the same attributes.
Group
Parameters are set according to the network planning
information.
4 A.8.5 Required when the XPIC function is not enabled on the IFX2
Setting IF board. In this case, set XPIC Enabled to Disabled.
Attributes NOTE
To configure 1+1 protection radio links, you need to configure the
information about the main IF board only.
NOTE
l a: Generally, during the site commissioning, the previous steps are completed. After the site commissioning,
however, you need to reset Enable AM and ATPC Enable Status.
l In the case of radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information
on the main radio link only. In the case of radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need to configure the IF
and ODU information on the main radio link and the ODU information on the standby radio link.
l To configure Hybrid radio links with N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF and ODU information
on each link.
Number of 16 8 8 14 8
E1 services
l To improve transmission reliability of important services, the radio links between NE1 and
NE2 are configured as a 1+1 HSB protection group.
l The ATPC function is enabled to reduce inter-site interference.
Between NE1 and NE2 3-IF1 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
4-IF1 (standby IF board)
Between NE2 and NE1 3-IF1 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
4-IF1 (standby IF board)
NOTE
l To prevent interference on a microwave site, it is recommended that you plan the microwave site as
only a TX high site or a TX low site at a time.
l To prevent interference between two radio links on a microwave site that use transmit frequencies with
a small spacing between, it is recommended that you set the two radio links to operate in different
polarization directions.
l The planning information that is not related to the configuration of the IDU (except for the polarization
direction) is not provided in this example.
Receive power -42 (NE1) -44 (NE3) -43 (NE3) -48 (NE5)
(dBm) -42 (NE2) -44 (NE4) -43 (NE5) -48 (NE6)
Upper threshold -32 (NE1) -34 (NE3) -33 (NE3) -38 (NE5)
of ATPC -32 (NE2) -34 (NE4) -33 (NE5) -38 (NE6)
adjustment
(dBm)
Lower threshold -52 (NE1) -54 (NE3) -53 (NE3) -58 (NE5)
of ATPC -52 (NE2) -54 (NE4) -53 (NE5) -58 (NE6)
adjustment
(dBm)
Maximum - - - -
transmit power
(dBm)
NOTE
l In this example, the ATPC is enabled to reduce the inter-site interference. The ATPC may be disabled if
there is no such a requirement.
l The ATPC controls the receive power within a range, namely, (2 dB more or less than the central value
between the upper threshold and lower threshold of ATPC adjustment). Hence, this example sets the upper
threshold to 10 dB higher than the receive power, and the lower threshold is 10 dB lower than the receive
power.
l The maximum transmit power is the actual maximum transmit power of the ODU after the ATPC is enabled.
When this parameter is not specified, the value of the parameter is the rated maximum transmit power of
the ODU. If the ODU works at the rated maximum transmit power, the electromagnetic wave agrees with
the spectrum configuration profile. Hence, this parameter is not set generally.
Information of IF Boards
According to the radio type, slot priorities of IF boards, and configuration rules of the 1+1
protection, you can obtain the information of IF boards as provided in Table 3-13.
Main IF board 3-IF1 (NE1) 3-IF1 (NE3) 4-IF1 (NE3) 3-IF1 (NE5)
3-IF1 (NE2) 3-IF1 (NE4) 4-IF1 (NE5) 3-IF1 (NE6)
Reverse Disabled - - -
switching
enabling
l It is recommended that you configure the IF board in slot 3 as the main IF board when
configuring a 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection group.
l If there are no special requirements, the other parameters of the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD all take
default values.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.8.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group and create the IF 1+1 protection groups for
NE1 and NE2.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE1
Parameter Value
NE1
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE2
Step 2 See A.8.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link and configure the IF/ODU
information of the radio link.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Link ID 101
TX Frequency(MHz) 14930
TX Power(dBm) 5
TX Status unmute
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Link ID 101
TX Frequency(MHz) 14510
TX Power(dBm) 5
TX Status unmute
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
TX Power(dBm) 10 10
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Link ID 102
TX Frequency(MHz) 14952
TX Power(dBm) 10
TX Status unmute
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
TX Power(dBm) 15 10
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Link ID 104
TX Frequency(MHz) 14510
TX Power(dBm) 15
TX Status unmute
Step 3 See A.4.1 Creating an Optical Transmission Line or Radio Link by Using the Search
Method and create radio links connections.
The main topology should display all the created radio links.
----End
Based on 2.4 Configuration Example (Ring Network), configure the TDM radio links
according to the network planning information (as shown in Figure 3-6):
l The service capacity accessed by each BTS is provided in Table 3-14.
Number of E1 4 4 4 4
services
BSC
101 104
14930M 14958M
14510M 14538M
16E1,14M,16QAM NE1 16E1,14M,16QAM
1+0 1+0
V-polarzation V-polarization
Tx high Tx high
Tx low Tx low
BTS1
Tx low Tx low
NE2 NE4 BTS4
Tx high Tx high
BTS2 102 103
14958M 14930M
14538M 14510M
16E1,14M,16QAM 4E1 16E1,14M,16QAM
1+0 1+0
H-polarization NE3 H-polarzation
BTS3
Link ID
Tx high station Tx Freq.
Tx low station Tx Freq.
Radio work mode
RF configuarion
Polarization
Radio working 16E1, 14MHz, 16E1, 14MHz, 16E1, 14MHz, 16E1, 14MHz,
mode 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM
NOTE
The planning information that is not related to the configuration of the IDU (except for the polarization
direction) is not provided in this example.
Receive power -46 (NE1) -44 (NE3) -43 (NE3) -47 (NE1)
(dBm) -46 (NE2) -44 (NE2) -43 (NE4) -47 (NE4)
Upper threshold -36 (NE1) -34 (NE3) -33 (NE3) -37 (NE1)
of ATPC -36 (NE2) -34 (NE2) -33 (NE4) -37 (NE4)
adjustment
(dBm)
Lower threshold -56 (NE1) -54 (NE3) -53 (NE3) -57 (NE1)
of ATPC -56 (NE2) -54 (NE2) -53 (NE4) -57 (NE4)
adjustment
(dBm)
Maximum - - - -
transmit power
(dBm)
NOTE
l In this example, the ATPC is enabled to reduce the inter-site interference. The ATPC may be disabled if
there is no such a requirement.
l The ATPC controls the receive power within a range, namely, (2 dB more or less than the central value of
the upper threshold and lower threshold of ATPC adjustment). Hence, this example sets the upper threshold
to 10 dB higher than the receive power, and the lower threshold is 10 dB lower than the receive power.
l The maximum transmit power is the actual maximum transmit power of the ODU after the ATPC is enabled.
When this parameter is not specified, the value of the parameter is the rated maximum transmit power of
the ODU. If the ODU works at the rated maximum transmit power, the electromagnetic wave agrees with
the spectrum configuration profile. Hence, this parameter is not set generally.
Main IF board 4-IF1 (NE1) 4-IF1 (NE2) 4-IF1 (NE3) 4-IF1 (NE4)
3-IF1 (NE2) 3-IF1 (NE3) 3-IF1 (NE4) 3-IF1 (NE1)
Standby IF - - - -
board
Revertive mode - - - -
WTR time(s) - - - -
Reverse - - - -
switching Disabled
enabling
Procedure
Step 1 See A.8.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link and configure the IF/ODU
information of the radio link.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Parameter Value
TX Power(dBm) 8 9
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
TX Power(dBm) 9 10
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Parameter Value
TX Power(dBm) 10 10
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
TX Power(dBm) 10 8
Step 2 A.4.1 Creating an Optical Transmission Line or Radio Link by Using the Search
Method and create radio links connections.
The main topology should display all the created radio links.
----End
Number of 4 2 4 4 4
E1 services
Capacity of 45 15 20 25 15
Ethernet
services
(Mbit/s)
l To improve transmission reliability of important services, the radio links between NE1 and
NE2 are configured as a 1+1 HSB protection group.
Between NE1 and NE2 3-IFU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
4-IFU2 (standby IF board)
Between NE2 and NE1 3-IFU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
4-IFU2 (standby IF board)
Channel 28 14 14 7
spacing (MHz)
NOTE
The planning information that is not related to the configuration of the IDU (except for the polarization
direction) is not provided in this example.
Number of E1 18 6 8 4
services
Capacity of 120 35 40 15
Ethernet
services (Mbit/
s)
NOTE
The Hybrid radio capacity and the AM function require the proper license file.
Receive power -46 (NE1) -44 (NE3) -43 (NE3) -48 (NE5)
(dBm) -46 (NE2) -44 (NE4) -43 (NE5) -48 (NE6)
ATPC - - - -
automatic
threshold
enabling
Upper threshold - - - -
of ATPC
adjustment
(dBm)
Lower threshold - - - -
of ATPC
adjustment
(dBm)
Maximum - - - -
transmit power
(dBm)
NOTE
Main IF board 3-IFU2 (NE1) 3-IFU2 (NE3) 4-IFU2 (NE3) 3-IFU2 (NE5)
3-IFU2 (NE2) 3-IFU2 (NE4) 4-IFU2 (NE5) 3-IFU2 (NE6)
Reverse Disabled - - -
switching
enabling
l It is recommended that you configure the IF board in slot 3 as the main IF board when
configuring a 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection group.
l If there are no special requirements, it is recommended that you plan the other parameters
of the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD to be the default values.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.8.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group and create the IF 1+1 protection groups for
NE1 and NE2.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE1
Parameter Value
NE1
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE2
Step 2 See A.8.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link and configure the IF/ODU
information of the radio link.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Enable AM Enabled
Link ID 101
TX Frequency(MHz) 14930
TX Power(dBm) 16.5
TX Status unmute
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Enable AM Enabled
Link ID 101
TX Frequency(MHz) 14510
TX Power(dBm) 16.5
TX Status unmute
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Specified Max E1 6 8
Capacity
Parameter Value
TX Power(dBm) 16.5 16
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Enable AM Enabled
Link ID 102
TX Frequency(MHz) 14952
TX Power(dBm) 16.5
TX Status unmute
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Parameter Value
Specified Max E1 4 8
Capacity
TX Power(dBm) 20 16
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Channel Space 7M
Enable AM Enabled
Link ID 104
TX Frequency(MHz) 14510
TX Power(dBm) 20
TX Status unmute
Step 3 A.4.1 Creating an Optical Transmission Line or Radio Link by Using the Search
Method and create radio links connections.
The main topology should display all the created radio links.
----End
Number of E1 4 4 4 4
services
Capacity of 10 10 10 10
Ethernet
services (Mbit/
s)
BSC
101 104
14930M 14958M
14510M 14538M
14M NE1 14M
1+0 1+0
V-polarzation V-polarization
Tx high Tx high
Tx low Tx low
BTS1
Tx low Tx low
NE2 NE4 BTS4
Tx high Tx high
BTS2 102 103
14958M 14930M
14538M 14510M
14M 4E1 14M
1+0 1+0
H-polarization NE3 H-polarzation
BTS3
Link ID
Tx high station Tx Freq.
Tx low station Tx Freq.
Channel spacing
RF configuarion
Polarization
Channel 14 14 14 14
spacing (MHz)
NOTE
The planning information that is not related to the configuration of the IDU (except for the polarization
direction) is not provided in this example.
Number of E1 16 16 16 16
services
Capacity of 40 40 40 40
Ethernet
services (Mbit/
s)
NOTE
l According to the Hybrid ring protection scheme, each Hybrid radio link must carry all the services on
the ring.
l The Hybrid radio capacity and the AM function require the appropriate license file.
Receive power -42 (NE1) -44 (NE3) -43 (NE3) -45 (NE1)
(dBm) -42 (NE2) -44 (NE2) -43 (NE4) -45 (NE4)
ATPC - - - -
automatic
threshold
enabling
Upper threshold - - - -
of ATPC
adjustment
(dBm)
Lower threshold - - - -
of ATPC
adjustment
(dBm)
Maximum - - - -
transmit power
(dBm)
NOTE
Main IF board 4-IFU2 (NE1) 4-IFU2 (NE2) 4-IFU2 (NE3) 4-IFU2 (NE4)
3-IFU2 (NE2) 3-IFU2 (NE3) 3-IFU2 (NE4) 3-IFU2 (NE1)
Standby IF - - - -
board
Revertive mode - - - -
WTR time(s) - - - -
Reverse - - - -
switching
enabling
Procedure
Step 1 See A.8.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link and configure the IF/ODU
information of the radio link.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Specified Max E1 16 16
Capacity
Parameter Value
TX Power(dBm) 15 16.5
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Specified Max E1 16 16
Capacity
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Parameter Value
Specified Max E1 16 16
Capacity
TX Power(dBm) 16.5 16
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Specified Max E1 16 16
Capacity
Parameter Value
TX Power(dBm) 15 16
Step 2 See A.4.1 Creating an Optical Transmission Line or Radio Link by Using the Search
Method and create radio links connections.
The main topology should display all the created radio links.
----End
The key to configuring TDM services is configuring the corresponding service cross-
connections.
Linear MSP
Linear MSP applies to point-to-point physical networks. Linear MSP provides protection for the
services between two multiplex section termination (MST) modules. That is, when a linear MSP
switching occurs, the services are switched from the working section to the protection section.
In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, linear MSP provides protection for TDM services that are
transmitted over SDH fibers.
Linear MSP is classified into 1+1 linear MSP and 1:N linear MSP.
l 1+1 linear MSP
To realize the 1+1 linear MSP, one working channel and one protection channel are
required. The protection channel does not transmit extra services. When the working
channel becomes unavailable, services are switched to the protection channel for
transmission. Figure 4-1 shows the application of 1+1 linear MSP. According to the
revertive mode, 1+1 linear MSP is classified into dual-ended revertive, dual-ended non-
revertive, single-ended revertive, and single-ended non-revertive modes. The single-ended
non-revertive mode is the most common linear MSP mode.
Protection
channel
Protection switching
Working
NE A NE B
channel
Protection
channel
Protection switching
NE A Working NE B
channel 1
Normal Normal
service 1 service1
... Working ...
channel N
Normal Normal
service N service N
Protection
channel
Extra Extra
service service
SNCP
In the case of subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), the protection subnetwork connection
takes over when the working subnetwork connection fails or deteriorates. In the case of the
OptiX RTN 910, SNCP provides protection for TDM services that are transmitted on STM-1
fiber ring networks, TDM radio ring networks, Hybrid radio ring networks, or hybrid ring
networks that comprise optical network equipment and Hybrid radio equipment.
The SNCP protection scheme, which requires one working subnetwork and one protection
subnetwork, selects one service from the dually transmitted services. In the case of SNCP, the
services are switched to the protection subnetwork for transmission when the working
subnetwork connection fails or deteriorates. Figure 4-3 shows the application of SNCP.
Working SNC
NE A NE B
Protection SNC
Protection switching
Working SNC
NE A NE B
Protection SNC
The OptiX RTN 910 supports the coexistence of SNCP and the 1+1 protection or N+1 protection.
In the case of coexistence of the SNCP and the 1+1 protection or N+1 protection, you can set
the hold-off time for SNCP so that the protection switching for the radio link can be performed
first, thus preventing circular switchings.
TDM Radio
When the IF board works in PDH radio mode and when the radio capacity is nxE1, the first to
nth VC-12 timeslots on the IF board are available and correspond to first to nth E1s that are
transmitted over microwave. For example, if the radio capacity is 4xE1, only the first to fourth
VC-12 timeslots in VC4-1 on the IF board are available. If a cross-connection is configured
between the E1 port of a service board and the second VC-12 in VC4-1 on the IF board, the E1
services that are accessed from the E1 port are sent to the second E1 timeslot that is transmitted
over radio. If the radio capacity is E3, only the first VC-3 timeslot in VC4-1 on the IF board is
available and corresponds to the E3 timeslot that is transmitted over microwave.
When the IF board works in STM-1 radio mode, all the timeslots in VC4-1 on the IF board are
available and correspond to the timeslots in the VC-4 that is transmitted on microwave.
Hybrid Radio
When the IF board works in Hybrid radio mode and when the E1 Capacity is set to n in Hybrid/
AM Configuration, the first to nth VC-12 timeslots on the IF board are available and correspond
to the first to nth E1 timeslots that are transmitted over microwave. For example, if the E1
capacity is 75xE1, only the first to sixty-third VC-12 timeslots in VC4-1 and the first to twelfth
VC-12 timeslots in VC4-2 on the IF board are available. If a cross-connection is configured
between the E1 port of a service board and the second VC-12 in VC4-2 on the IF board, the E1
services that are accessed from the E1 port are sent to the sixty-fifth E1 timeslot that is transmitted
over microwave.
1 4 7 10 13 16 19 1
1
{ 22
43
25
46
28
49
31
52
34
55
37
58
40
61
2
3
1
{
2 5 8 11 14 17 20
TUG-3 TU-12
2 23 26 29 32 35 38 41 2
44 47 50 53 56 59 62 3
3 6 9 12 15 18 21 1
3
{ 24
45
27
48
30
51
33
54
36
57
39
60
42
63
2
3
1 4 7 10 13 16 19 1
1
{ 2
3
5
6
8
9
11
12
14
15
17
18
20
21
2
3
1
{
22 25 28 31 34 37 40
TUG-3 TU-12
2 23 26 29 32 35 38 41 2
24 27 30 33 36 39 42 3
43 46 49 52 55 58 61 1
3
{ 44
45
47
48
50
51
53
54
56
57
59
60
62
63
2
3
VC4-2 ......
As shown in Figure 4-6, the timeslot allocation diagram contains three areas, namely, site area,
timeslot area, and timeslot allocation area.
The site area contains the NE icons and interface boards that carry radio links.
l The start and end NEs each have only one interface board, which is located under the NE
icon. The intermediate NEs each have two interface boards, which are located at the two
sides of the vertical line under the NE icon. The interface boards may be IF boards or line
boards.
l The interface board on the left side of the vertical line under an NE icon is connected to
the interface board on the right side of the vertical line under its upstream NE icon. The
interface board on the right side of the vertical line under an NE icon is connected to the
interface board on the left side of the vertical line under its downstream NE icon.
l In the case of a ring radio link, before planning the site area, you need to divide the ring
radio link into a chain radio link and ensure that the start and end NEs are the same one.
The timeslot area represents the VC-4 timeslot resources. For example, in the case of radio links,
timeslots occupied by an STM-1 service are all in the first VC-4.
In the timeslot allocation area, each straight line represents a service and the numeric above the
straight line represents the timeslot occupied by this service.
l A black dot indicates that services are added to or dropped from the NE. The board under
a black dot indicates the board and corresponding ports on the board that are used for adding
or dropping services.
l An arrow indicates that services are transferred on the NE.
l If a straight line passes a vertical line without any arrow or black dot, it indicates that
services pass through the NE.
l In the case of protection configuration (for example, 1+1 HSB protection) wherein the
working service and protection service have the uniform route, you only need to draw a
continuous line to represent the working service. In the case of protection configuration
(for example, SNCP) wherein the working service and protection service have different
routes, you need to draw a continuous line to represent the working service and a dotted
line to represent the protection service.
1. Select the chain that contains the maximum of hops as the main chain. Then, divide the
chain network into several sub-chains by considering the main chain as the reference.
Consider the E1 channels or fiber connections that are used for transferring services
between NEs as links.
2. Allocate the timeslots for the add/drop or pass-through services on the NEs of the main
chain one after another, in the descending order of the NE distance.
3. Repeat the previous step to configure the timeslots for the services on all the sub-chains.
This timeslot allocation method ensures that only the numbers of the timeslots that the services
on the nodes of the aggregation sub-chain occupy may change.
The principles for obtaining the timeslot cross-connection configurations from the non-SNCP
service timeslot allocation diagram are as follows:
l A straight line without any dot at either side represents a pass-through service. A straight
line with one dot represents an add/drop service. A straight line with an arrow represents
a transferred service. The vertical line under the NE name is considered as the reference.
l If a straight line representing a pass-through service crosses the vertical line, it indicates
that cross-connections are configured between the boards on both sides of the vertical line.
The corresponding cross-connected timeslots are marked over the straight line.
l If there is a straight line with one dot on one side of the vertical line, it indicates that cross-
connections are configured between the board on this side of the vertical line and the board
under the straight line with one dot. The corresponding cross-connected timeslots are
marked over the straight line with one dot.
l If there is a straight line with an arrow on both sides of the vertical line, it indicates that
cross-connections are configured between the two boards on both sides of the vertical line.
The corresponding cross-connected timeslots on each board are marked over the straight
line with an arrow on the side of this board.
For details, see 4.3 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a TDM Radio Chain
Network) and 4.5 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a Hybrid Radio Chain
Network).
1. Allocate the timeslots to add/drop services on the NEs in anti-clockwise order. Allocate
the minimum VC-12 timeslot number to the service on the nearest NE. The number of the
timeslot each service occupies does not change on the ring network.
2. Repeat the previous step to configure the timeslots for the services on all the sub-chains.
This timeslot allocation method ensures that only the timeslots that the services on the nodes of
the aggregation sub-chain occupy change.
The principles for obtaining the timeslot cross-connection configurations from the SNCP service
timeslot allocation diagram are as follows:
l A straight line without any dot at either side represents a pass-through service. A straight
line with one dot represents an add/drop service. A straight line with an arrow represents
a transferred service. The vertical line under the NE name is considered as the reference.
l If a straight line representing a pass-through service crosses the vertical line, it indicates
that cross-connections are configured between the boards on both sides of the vertical line.
The corresponding cross-connected timeslots are marked over the straight line.
l If there is a straight line with one dot on one side of the vertical line, it indicates that SNCP
cross-connections are configured between the board on this side of the vertical line and the
board under the straight line with one dot. The corresponding cross-connected timeslots
are marked over the straight line with one dot.
For details, see 4.4 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a TDM Radio Ring
Network) and 4.6 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a Hybrid Radio Ring
Network).
Required
Start
Optional
Configuring linear MSP
Setting parameters
of SDH port
End
3 A.10.3 Configuring the Optional when the TDM service is an SNCP service.
Automatic Switching
of SNCP Services
7 A.10.10 Testing the E1 The test results should show that each E1 service
Service Through contains no bit errors.
PRBS
NOTE
a: In the case of 1+1 protection configuration or 1+1 linear MSP, you need to configure the TDM service on the
working channel only. In the case of N+1 protection configuration or 1:N linear MSP, you also need to configure
the extra services on the protection channel if required.
Figure 4-8 Networking diagram (TDM services on a TDM radio chain network)
8xE1
BTS2
STM-1 STM-1
8xE1 NE4
BTS3
16xE1
NE3 NE2 NE1 BSC
14xE1 BTS1
8xE1
NE6 NE5
BTS5 BTS4
Between NE1 and the BSC 8-SL1D-1 (working port) Configure the ports as a 1+1
linear MSP group.
Between NE1 and NE2 3-IF1 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
4-IF1 (standby IF board)
Between NE2 and BTS1 9-SP3S (1-16) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS1.
Between NE2 and NE1 3-IF1 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
4-IF1 (standby IF board)
Between NE4 and BTS2 9-SP3S (1-16) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS2 and
Between NE4 and BTS3 BTS3.
Between NE5 and BTS4 9-SP3S (1-14) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS4.
Between NE6 and BTS5 9-SP3S (1-8) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS5.
Figure 4-9 Timeslot allocation diagram (TDM services on the TDM radio chain network)
Links-1: NE1 - NE2 - NE3 -NE6
Station BS
NE1 NE2 NE3 NE5 NE6
C
Timeslot 8-SL1D-1 3-IF1 3-IF1 8-SL1D-1 8-SL1D-1 4-IF1 4-IF1 3-IF1 3-IF1
VC12: 1-8
VC12: 9-22 9-SP3S:1-8
Links-2: NE3-NE4
Station NE3 NE4
Timeslot 8-SL1D-1 3-IF1 3-IF1
VC12: 23-38 VC12: 1-16
VC4-1
9-SP3S:1-16
Pass through
Add/Drop
Foward
As shown in Figure 4-9, the information about the timeslots that the TDM services occupy on
each NE is as follows:
l E1 services on NE6:
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to eighth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 9 of NE6.
– The E1 services occupy the first to eighth VC-12 timeslots on the link between the first
optical port on the SL1D board in slot 8 of NE1 and the IF1 board in slot 3 of NE6.
l E1 services on NE5:
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to fourteenth ports on the SP3S
board in slot 9 of NE5.
– The E1 services occupy the ninth to twenty-second VC-12 timeslots on the link between
the first optical port on the SL1D board in slot 8 of NE1 and the IF1 board in slot 3 of
NE5.
l E1 services on NE4:
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to sixteenth ports on the SP3S
board in slot 9 of NE4.
– The E1 services occupy the twenty-third to thirty-eighth VC-12 timeslots on the link
between the first optical port on the SL1D board in slot 8 of NE1 and the SL1D board
in slot 8 of NE3.
– The E1 services occupy the first to sixteenth VC-12 timeslots on the link between the
IF1 board in slot 3 of NE3 and the IF1 board in slot 3 of NE4.
l E1 services on NE2:
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to sixteenth ports on the SP3S
board in slot 9 of NE2.
– The E1 services occupy the thirty-ninth to fifty-fourth VC-12 timeslots on the link
between the first optical port on the SL1D board in slot 8 of NE1 and the IF1 board in
slot 3 of NE2.
Linear MSP
In this configuration example, no extra services need to be transmitted. Hence, the single-ended
non-revertive 1+1 linear MSP is configured to protect the optical transmission line between NE1
and BSC. Table 4-8 provides the related planning information.
Parameter NE1
Parameter NE1
NOTE
Unless otherwise specified, SD Enable, Protocol Type take the default values.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.9.1 Configuring Linear MSP and configure 1+1 linear MSP.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE1
SD Enable Enabled
Step 2 See A.10.1 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services and create the point-
to-point service cross-connections.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE1
Level VC-12
Direction Bidirectional
Parameter Value
NE1
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE2
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE3
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE4
Level VC-12
Direction Bidirectional
Sink VC4 -
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE5
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE6
Level VC-12
Direction Bidirectional
Parameter Value
NE6
Sink VC4 -
Step 3 See A.10.10 Testing the E1 Service Through PRBS and test the E1 services.
Test two E1 services on each BTS. The test results should show that the E1 services contain no
bit errors.
----End
Figure 4-10 Networking diagram (TDM services on a TDM radio ring network)
16xE1
NE1
BSC
4xE1
BTS1 4xE1
BTS2
4xE1
NE3
BTS3
Between NE1 and the BSC 9-SP3S (1-16) Configure this port to access
services from the BSC.
Between NE2 and BTS1 9-SP3S (1-8) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS1 and
Between NE2 and BTS2 BTS2.
Configure this port to be the
SNCP service sink.
Between NE3 and BTS3 9-SP3S (1-4) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS3.
Between NE4 and BTS4 9-SP3S (1-4) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS4.
Figure 4-11 Timeslot allocation diagram (TDM service on the TDM radio ring network)
Station NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE1
Timeslot 4-IF1 3-IF1 4-IF1 3-IF1 4-IF1 3-IF1 4-IF1 3-IF1
VC12: 1-8 VC12: 1-8
9-SP3S:1-8 9-SP3S:1-8 9-SP3S:1-8 9-SP3S:1-8
VC12: 9-12 VC12: 9-12
VC4-1 9-SP3S:9-12 9-SP3S:1-4 9-SP3S:1-4 9-SP3S:9-12
VC12: 13-16 VC12: 13-16
9-SP3S:13-16 9-SP3S:1-4 9-SP3S:1-4 9-SP3S:13-16
As shown in Figure 4-11, the information about the timeslots that the TDM services occupy on
each NE is as follows:
l E1 services on NE2:
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to eighth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 9 of NE2.
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to eighth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 9 of NE1.
– The E1 services occupy the first to eighth VC-12 timeslots on the ring.
l E1 services on NE3:
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to fourth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 9 of NE3.
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the ninth to twelfth ports on the SP3S
board in slot 9 of NE1.
– The E1 services occupy the ninth to twelfth VC-12 timeslots on the ring.
l E1 services on NE4:
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to fourth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 9 of NE4.
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the thirteenth to sixteenth ports on the
SP3S board in slot 9 of NE1.
– The E1 services occupy the thirteenth to sixteenth VC-12 timeslots on the ring.
SNCP
Table 4-13 provides the information about SNCP.
NOTE
Unless otherwise specified, WTR Time, Hold-Off Time, and Switching Condition take the default values.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.10.2 Creating Cross-Connections of SNCP Services and configure the SNCP service
cross-connections.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE1
Hold-off Time(100ms) 0 0
Sink VC4 - -
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE2
Direction Bidirectional
Level VC-12
Hold-off Time(100ms) 0
Parameter Value
NE2
Sink VC4 -
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE3
Direction Bidirectional
Level VC-12
Hold-off Time(100ms) 0
Sink VC4 -
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE4
Direction Bidirectional
Level VC-12
Hold-off Time(100ms) 0
Parameter Value
NE4
Sink VC4 -
Step 2 See A.10.1 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services and configure the
service cross-connections on NE2, NE3, and NE4.
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE2
Level VC-12
Direction Bidirectional
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE3
Level VC-12
Direction Bidirectional
Parameter Value
NE3
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE4
Level VC-12
Direction Bidirectional
Step 3 See A.10.10 Testing the E1 Service Through PRBS and test the E1 services.
Test two E1 services on each BTS. The test results should show that the E1 services contain no
bit errors.
----End
Figure 4-12 Networking diagram (TDM services on a Hybrid radio chain network)
2E1
BTS2
E1 STM-1
4E1 NE4
BTS3
4E1
NE3 NE2 NE1 BSC
4E1 BTS1
4E1
NE6 NE5
BTS5 BTS4
Between NE1 and the BSC 8-SL1D-1 (working port) Configure the ports as a 1+1
linear MSP group.
8-SL1D-2 (protection port)
Between NE1 and NE2 3-IFU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
4-IFU2 (standby IF board)
Between NE2 and BTS1 9-SP3D (15-18) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS1.
Between NE2 and NE1 3-IFU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
4-IFU2 (standby IF board)
Between NE4 and BTS2 9-SP3S (1-6) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS2 and
Between NE4 and BTS3 BTS3.
Between NE5 and BTS4 9-SP3S (1-4) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS4.
Between NE6 and BTS5 9-SP3S (1-4) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS5.
Figure 4-13 Timeslot allocation diagram (TDM services on the Hybrid chain radio network)
Links-1: NE1 - NE2 - NE3 -NE5
Station
BSC NE1 NE2 NE3 NE5 NE6
Timeslot 8-SL1D 3-IFU2 3-IFU2 9-SP3D 9-SP3S 4-IFU2 4-IFU2 3-IFU2 3-IFU2
VC12: 1-4
VC12: 5-8 9-SP3S:1-4
VC12: 9-14 9-SP3S:1-4
VC4-1
VC12: 15-18
9-SP3D:15-18
Links-2: NE3-NE4
Station NE3 NE4
Timeslot 9-SP3S 3-IFU2 3-IFU2
VC12: 9-14 VC12: 1-6
VC4-1
9-SP3S:1-6
Pass through
Add/Drop
Fow ard
As shown in Figure 4-13, the information about the timeslots that the TDM services occupy on
each NE is as follows:
l E1 services of NE6:
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to fourth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 9 of NE6.
– The E1 services occupy the first to fourth VC-12 timeslots on the link between the first
optical port on the SL1D board in slot 8 of NE1 and the IFU2 board in slot 3 of NE6.
l E1 services on NE5:
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to fourth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 9 of NE5.
– The E1 services occupy the fifth to eighth VC-12 timeslots on the link between the first
optical port on the SL1D board in slot 8 of NE1 and the IFU2 board in slot 4 of NE5.
l E1 services on NE4:
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to sixth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 9 of NE4.
– The E1 services occupy the ninth to fourteenth VC-12 timeslots on the link between the
first optical port on the SL1D board in slot 8 of NE1 and the SP3S board in slot 9 of
NE3.
– The E1 services occupy the first to sixth VC-12 timeslots on the link between the IFU2
board in slot 3 of NE3 and the IFU2 board in slot 3 of NE4.
l E1 services on NE2:
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the fifteenth to eighteenth ports on the
SP3S board in slot 9 of NE2.
– The E1 services occupy the fifteenth to eighteenth VC-12 timeslots on the link between
the first optical port on the SL1D board in slot 8 of NE1 to the IFU2 board in slot 3 of
NE2.
Linear MSP
In this configuration example, no extra services need to be transmitted. Hence, the single-ended
non-revertive 1+1 linear MSP is configured to protect the optical transmission line between NE1
and BSC. Table 4-20 provides the related planning information.
Parameter NE1
NOTE
Unless otherwise specified, SD Enable, Protocol Type take the default values.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.9.1 Configuring Linear MSP and configure the linear MSP.
Parameter Value
NE1
SD Enable Enabled
Step 2 See A.10.1 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services and create point-to-
point service cross-connections.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE1
Level VC-12
Direction Bidirectional
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE2
Level VC-12
Parameter Value
NE2
Direction Bidirectional
Sink VC4 -
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE3
Source VC4 - -
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE4
Level VC-12
Direction Bidirectional
Parameter Value
NE4
Sink VC4 -
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE5
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE6
Level VC-12
Direction Bidirectional
Sink VC4 -
Step 3 See A.10.10 Testing the E1 Service Through PRBS and test the E1 services.
Test two E1 services on each BTS. The test results should show that the E1 services contain no
bit errors.
----End
Figure 4-14 Networking diagram (TDM services on a Hybrid radio ring network)
16xE1
NE1
BSC
4xE1
BTS1 4xE1
BTS2
4xE1
NE3
BTS3
Between NE1 and the BSC 9-SP3S (1-16) Configure this port to access
services from the BSC.
Between NE2 and BTS1 9-SP3S (1-8) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS1 and
Between NE2 and BTS2 BTS2.
Between NE3 and BTS3 9-SP3S (1-4) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS3.
Between NE4 and BTS4 9-SP3S (1-4) Configure the ports to access
services from BTS4.
Figure 4-15 Timeslot allocation diagram (TDM services on the Hybrid radio ring network)
Station NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE1
Timeslot 4-IFU2 3-IFU2 4-IFU2 3-IFU2 4-IFU2 3-IFU2 4-IFU2 3-IFU2
VC12: 1-8 VC12: 1-8
9-SP3S:1-8 9-SP3S:1-8 9-SP3S:1-8 9-SP3S:1-8
VC12: 9-12 VC12: 9-12
VC4-1 9-SP3S:9-12 9-SP3S:1-4 9-SP3S:1-4 9-SP3S:9-12
VC12: 13-16 VC12: 13-16
9-SP3S:13-16 9-SP3S:1-4 9-SP3S:1-4 9-SP3S:13-16
As shown in Figure 4-15, the information about the timeslots that the TDM services occupy on
each NE is as follows:
l E1 services on NE2:
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to eighth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 9 of NE2.
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to eighth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 9 of NE1.
– The E1 services occupy the first to eighth VC-12 timeslots on the ring.
l E1 services on NE3:
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to fourth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 9 of NE3.
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the ninth to twelfth ports on the SP3S
board in slot 9 of NE1.
– The E1 services occupy the ninth to twelfth VC-12 timeslots on the ring.
l E1 services on NE4:
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to fourth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 9 of NE4.
– The E1 services are added to or dropped from the thirteenth to sixteenth ports on the
SP3S board in slot 9 of NE1.
– The E1 services occupy the thirteenth to sixteenth VC-12 timeslots on the ring.
SNCP
Table 4-25 provides the information about SNCP.
Parameter NE1
NOTE
Unless otherwise specified, WTR Time, Hold-Off Time, and Switching Condition take the default values.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.10.2 Creating Cross-Connections of SNCP Services and configure the SNCP service
cross-connections.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE1
Hold-off Time(100ms) 0 0
Parameter Value
NE1
Sink VC4 - -
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE2
Direction Bidirectional
Level VC-12
Hold-off Time(100ms) 0
Sink VC4 -
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE3
Direction Bidirectional
Level VC-12
Hold-off Time(100ms) 0
Sink VC4 -
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE4
Direction Bidirectional
Level VC-12
Hold-off Time(100ms) 0
Sink VC4 -
Step 2 See A.10.1 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services and configure the
service cross-connections on NE2, NE3, and NE4.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE2
Level VC-12
Direction Bidirectional
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE3
Level VC-12
Direction Bidirectional
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE4
Level VC-12
Direction Bidirectional
Parameter Value
NE4
Step 3 See A.10.10 Testing the E1 Service Through PRBS and test the E1 services.
Test two E1 services on each BTS. The test results should show that the E1 services contain no
bit errors.
----End
Ethernet services are classified into E-Line services and E-LAN services.
The IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the Hybrid IF board. In the transmit direction
of Hybrid radio, the Ethernet services transmitted to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the Hybrid IF
board through the IF_ETH port and are then mapped into the Hybrid microwave frames. In the
receive direction of Hybrid radio, the Ethernet services are demapped from the Hybrid
microwave frames and then transmitted to the packet switching unit through the IF_ETH port.
The main differences between the IF_ETH port and the GE/FE port are as follows:
l The IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port. It transmits and receives MAC frames and
does not have PHY-layer functions.
l The bandwidth over the IF_ETH port is equal to the Ethernet service bandwidth that the
Hybrid radio supports. Hence, when the AM function is enabled in the case of Hybrid radio,
the bandwidth over the IF_ETH port changes according to the modulation scheme.
5.1.2 Auto-Negotiation
The auto-negotiation function allows the network equipment to send information of its supported
working mode to the opposite end on the network and to receive the corresponding information
that the opposite end may transfer.
Table 5-1 Auto-negotiation rules of FE electrical ports (when the local FE electrical port adopts
the auto-negotiation mode)
NOTE
As provided in Table 5-1, when the working mode of the opposite FE electrical port is 10M full-duplex or 100M
full-duplex, the auto-negotiation result cannot realize the matching between the working modes of the FE
electrical ports at both ends. As a result, certain packets are lost. Hence, when the working mode of the opposite
FE electrical port is 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex, you need to set the working mode of the local FE
electrical port to 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex.
When the FE electrical ports at both ends work in auto-negotiation mode, the equipment at both
ends can negotiate the flow control function through the auto-negotiation function.
Table 5-2 Auto-negotiation rules of GE electrical ports (when the local GE electrical port adopts
the auto-negotiation mode)
NOTE
As provided in Table 5-2, when the working mode of the opposite GE electrical port is 10M full-duplex or
100M full-duplex, the auto-negotiation result cannot realize the matching between the working modes of the
GE electrical ports at both ends. As a result, certain packets are lost. Hence, when the working mode of the
opposite GE electrical port is 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex, you need to set the working mode of the
local GE electrical port to 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex.
When the GE electrical ports at both ends work in auto-negotiation mode, the equipment at both
ends can negotiate the flow control function through the auto-negotiation function.
The half-duplex Ethernet port applies the back-pressure mechanism to control the flow. The full-
duplex Ethernet port applies PAUSE frames to control the flow. Currently, the half-duplex
Ethernet function is not widely applied. Hence, the flow control function realized by Ethernet
service boards is used for the full-duplex Ethernet ports.
The flow control function realized by Ethernet service boards is classified into two types: auto-
negotiation flow control and non-auto-negotiation flow control.
The OptiX RTN 910 supports only two auto-negotiation flow control modes, namely, disabled mode and
symmetric PAUSE mode.
l Send only
The port can transmit PAUSE frames in the case of congestion but cannot process the
received PAUSE frames.
l Receive only
The port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames in
the case of congestion.
l Symmetric
The port can transmit PAUSE frames and can also process received PAUSE frames.
l Disabled
The port does not transmit or process PAUSE frames.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 supports only two non-auto-negotiation flow control modes, namely, disabled mode and
symmetric mode.
Service Model
Table 5-3 describes the point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service model.
Typical Application
Figure 5-1 shows the typical application scenarios of the point-to-point transparently transmitted
E-Line service model.
Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2 gain access to NE1 through port 1 and port 2
respectively, regardless of whether the two Ethernet services do not carry any VLAN ID or carry
unknown VLAN IDs. Port 1 and port 2 transparently transmit Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet
service 2 to port 3 and port 4, respectively. Port 3 and port 4 then transmit Ethernet service 1
and Ethernet service 2 to NE2.
Service processing on NE2 is the same as on NE1.
Models of Services
Table 5-4 shows the models of VLAN-based E-Line services.
Typical Applications
Figure 5-2 shows the typical application of service model 1.
Service 1 and Service 2 carry unknown VLAN IDs, and the two Ethernet services are accessed
to NE1 through Port 1 and Port 2 respectively. Port 1 and Port 2 process the incoming packets
based on their own TAG attributes. Then, Port 1 and Port 2 send Service 1 and Service 2 to Port
3 and Port 4 respectively. Port 3 and Port 4 process the incoming packets based on their own
TAG attributes. Then, Port 3 and Port 4 send Service 1 and Service 2 to NE2.
NE2 processes Service 1 and Service 2 in the same manner as NE1.
NOTE
The application of service model 1 is similar to point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services.
The difference is that ports need to process packets based on their TAG attributes in the application of
service model 1.
Figure 5-3 shows the typical application of service model 2. Service 1 and Service 2 carry
different VLAN IDs. Therefore, after the two Ethernet services are accessed to NE1 through
Port 1 and Port 2 respectively, they can share the same transmission channel at Port 3.
On NE1, Port 1 and Port 2 process the incoming packets based on their own TAG attributes.
Then, Port 1 and Port 2 send Service 1 and Service 2 to Port 3. Port 3 processes the incoming
packets based on its own TAG attribute, and then sends Service 1 and Service 2 to NE2. Due to
the different VLAN IDs, Service 1 and Service 2 can be transmitted through Port 3 at the same
time.
NE2 processes Service 1 and Service 2 in the same manner as NE1.
Model of Service
Table 5-5 shows the models of QinQ-based E-Line services.
Model 1 PORT (source) UNI-NNI Null (source) The source port adds
QinQ link (sink) QinQ (sink) the S-VLAN tag that
corresponds to the
QinQ link to all the
Ethernet frames, and
then transmits the
Ethernet frames to
the sink port where
the QinQ link is
configured.
Model 4 QinQ link (source) NNI-NNI QinQ (sink) The source port
QinQ link (sink) QinQ (sink) transmits the
Ethernet frames that
carry the S-VLAN
tag to the sink port
where the sink QinQ
link is configured.
The S-VLAN tag
carried in the
Ethernet frames
corresponds to the
source QinQ link. If
the source and sink
QinQ links
correspond to
different S-VLAN
tags, the S-VLAN
tags carried in the
Ethernet frames are
exchanged.
NOTE
Typical Applications
Figure 5-4 shows the typical application of service model 1.
Service 1 and Service 2 include tagged frames and untagged frames. Service 1 is accessed to
NE1 through Port 1, and Service 2 is accessed to NE1 through Port 2. Port 1 adds the
corresponding S-VLAN tag to Service 1, and Port 2 adds the corresponding S-VLAN tag to
Service 2. Then, Service 1 and Service 2 are transmitted to Port 3. Port 3 transmits Service 1
and Service 2 to NE2.
NE2 processes Service 1 and Service 2 in the same manner as NE1.
Strip S-VLAN Label Add S-VLAN Label Add S-VLAN Label Strip S-VLAN Label
NE 1 NE 2
Port 1 Port 1
E-Line
Service 1
Port 3 Transmission Port 3 E-Line Service 1
Unknown CVLAN Network Unknown CVLAN
Service 2 e E-Lin Service 2
Unknown CVLAN E-Lin e Unknown CVLAN
Port 2 Port 2
NE 1 NE 2
Port 1 Port 1
Service 1 E-Line Service 1
Port 3 Transmission Port 3 E-Line
VLAN ID: 100 Network VLAN ID: 100
Service 2 e E-Lin Service 2
VLAN ID: 200 E-Lin e
Port 2 Port 2 VLAN ID: 200
Service 1 and Service 2 carry a same S-VLAN tag. Service 1 is accessed to NE1 through Port
1, and Service 2 is accessed to NE1 through Port 2. Port 1 changes the S-VLAN tag carried in
Service 1 and Port 2 changes the S-VLAN tag carried in Service 2 so that the S-VLAN tags
carried in Service 1 and Service 2 are different. Port 3 transmits Service 1 and Service 2 to NE2.
NE 1 NE 2
Port 1 Port 1
E-Line
Service 1
Port 3 Transmission Port 3 E-Line Service 1
S-VLAN ID: 100 Network S-VLAN ID: 100
Service 2 e E-Lin Service 2
S-VLAN ID: 100 E-Lin e
Port 2 Port 2 S-VLAN ID: 100
Model of Service
Table 5-6 shows the model of E-LAN services based on the IEEE 802.1d bridge.
Table 5-6 Model of E-LAN services based on the IEEE 802.1d bridge
Typical Application
Figure 5-8 shows the typical application of the model of service. The transmission network
needs to carry the A services accessed from NE2 and NE3. The two A services are converged
at the convergence node NE1. The services need not be isolated. Therefore, an IEEE 802.1d
bridge is used at NE1 to groom services.
Figure 5-8 Model of E-LAN services based on the IEEE 802.1d bridge
NE 2
Port 2 Port 1
User A2
NE 1 Transmission
Network
Port 1 Port 2
User A1
Port 3
802.1d bridge NE 3
Transmission
Network
Port 1
User A3
Port 2
Model of Service
Table 5-7 shows the models of E-LAN services based on the IEEE 802.1q bridge.
Table 5-7 Model of E-LAN services based on the IEEE 802.1q bridge
Typical Applications
Figure 5-9 shows the typical application of the model of E-LAN services based on the IEEE
802.1q bridge. The transport network needs to carry G and H services accessed from NE2 and
NE3. Both types of services converge on NE1. G and H services adopt different VLAN planning.
Therefore, the IEEE 802.1q bridge is used on NEs and sub-switching domains are divided based
on VLANs, differentiating and separating the two types of services.
Figure 5-9 Model of E-LAN services based on the IEEE 802.1q bridge
NE 2
VLAN 100
Port 1
User G2
Port 3
NE 1
VLAN 200
Transmission Port 2
VLAN 100
Port 1 Network User H2
User G1
Port 3
802.1q bridge
VLAN 200
Port 2 Port 4
User H1 NE 3
Transmission
VLAN 100
Network
802.1q bridge Port 1
User G3
VLAN 200
Port 3 Port 2
User H3
802.1q bridge
NOTE
You can configure 5.1.4.2 VLAN-based E-Line Services on NE2 and NE3 for accessing services.
Model of Service
Table 5-8 shows the models of E-LAN services based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
Table 5-8 Models of E-LAN services based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge
Type of Tag Attribute Encapsulation Type of Learning Sub-
Services Mode of Port Logical Port Mode Switching
Domain
NOTE
a: When the encapsulation mode of port is 802.1q, the tag attribute must be Tag Aware.
Typical Applications
Figure 5-10 shows the typical application of the model of service. The transmission network
needs to carry G and H services accessed from NE2 and NE3. The two types of services are
converged on NE1. Since G and H services have a same C-VLAN tag, you need to add different
S-VLAN tags to G and H services for service isolation.
Figure 5-10 Model of E-LAN services based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge
NE 2
NE 2
SVLAN 300
Port 1
User G2
CVLAN 100
Port 3
SVLAN 400
NE 1 Port 2
Transmission User H2
SVLAN 300 Network CVLAN 100
Port 1 Port 3
User G1 802.1ad bridge
CVLAN 100
SVLAN 400
NE 3
Port 2
User H1
CVLAN 100 Port 4 SVLAN 300
Transmission
Port 1
Network
802.1ad bridge User G3
CVLAN 100
SVLAN 400
Port 3 Port 2
NE 1 User H3
CVLAN 100
Strip S-VLAN Label Add S-VLAN Label
NOTE
You can configure 5.1.4.3 QinQ-Based E-Line Services on NE2 and NE3 for service access.
In the case of IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN service networking, services are isolated by
means of VLAN IDs. That is, the IEEE 802.1q bridge is divided into multiple sub-switching
domains, which are isolated from each other.
5.1.5.4 Comparison Between the Three Networking Modes
The three networking modes differ from each other.
FE
BTS
VLAN 1 NE3
FE
NE2 Regional
BTS Hybrid microwave transmission network Backhaul Network
VLAN 2 GE
NE1 BSC
FE
BTS
VLAN 3 NE4
NE5
FE
BTS
VLAN 4
NOTE
IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN service packets are forwarded based on MAC addresses and may be broadcast
among all ports connected to the IEEE 802.1d bridge. Therefore, isolate the ports that need not communicate
with each other by adding the ports into a split horizon group.
FE
BTS
NE3
FE
NE2
Regional backhaul
BTS Hybrid microwave transmission network network GE
NE1 BSC
FE
BTS
NE5 NE4
FE
BTS NE6
NOTE
IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN service packets can be broadcast within each domain. Therefore, isolate the
ports that need not communicate with each other by adding the ports into a split horizon group.
FE
BTS
VLAN 1 NE3
FE
NE2 Domain 1
BTS VLAN 1 Regional backhaul
VLAN 1 network
Domain 2 GE
VLAN 2 NE1 BSC
Hybrid radio
network
FE
BTS
NE5 NE4
VLAN 2
FE
BTS
VLAN 2 NE6
NOTE
a: To block communication between certain ports connected to a bridge, you need to add the ports into a split
horizon group.
l Dynamic entry
A dynamic entry is obtained by learning of a bridge through the SVL/IVL mode. The
dynamic entry ages.
l Static entry
A static entry is manually added by a network administrator to the MAC address table by
using the NMS. The static entry does not age. Generally, the static entry is configured when
a port corresponds to a device with its MAC address known and this device transmits large
traffic for a long time.
l Blacklist entry
A blacklist entry, that is, the MAC disabled entry, is used to discard the data frame that
contains the specified MAC address (source MAC address or destination MAC address).
A blacklist entry is also called a blackhole entry. The blacklist entry is configured by the
network administrator. The blacklist entry does not age, and is not lost after the Ethernet
processing board is reset.
NOTE
If one routing entry is not updated in a certain period, that is, if no new packet from this MAC address is
received to enable the re-learning of this MAC address, this routing entry is automatically deleted. This
mechanism is called aging, and this period is called aging time.
Figure 5-15 shows a typical application of the split horizon group. NEs on the network are
configured with E-LAN services, and the east and west ports and service access ports are
configured as mounted ports of a bridge. In this case, if a split horizon group is not configured
at NE1, broadcast storm occurs due to a network loop as the east and west ports can forward
packets to each other. If a split horizon group is created at NE1 and the east and west ports are
configured as members of the split horizon group, the east and west ports do not forward packets
to each other. Therefore, a service loop is prevented.
NE1
BTS
BTS
NE3
BTS
NOTE
l ERPS can prevent a service loop on a ring network. Therefore, if ERPS is already enabled for a ring network,
a split horizon group is not needed as it may affect normal operation of ERPS.
l On the OptiX RTN 910, only the configuration of a split horizon group based on physical ports is supported.
Therefore, if a physical port is mapped into several logical ports and one of these logical ports is a member
of a split horizon group, the other logical ports are added to the split horizon group automatically.
ERPS
ERPS is applicable to ring physical networks and can provide protection for the E-LAN services
between all the nodes on the ring network. Generally, when a ring network is configured with
ERPS, the RPL node blocks the RPL port on one side so that all the services are transmitted
through the ports on the other side. In this manner, service loops are prevented. If a section of
link fails or an NE becomes faulty, the RPL node unblocks its RPL port so that the services are
switched from the faulty point to the RPL port for transmission. In this manner, protection for
the ring network is realized.
The Ethernet ring network shown in Figure 5-16 is configured with ERPS. Generally, the RPL
node (NE D) blocks its RPL port that is connected to NE A, and all the services are transmitted
over the link NE A <-> NE B <-> NE C <-> NE D. When the link between NE A <-> NE B
becomes faulty, NE D unblocks the blocked port so that the services can be transmitted over the
link NE A <-> NE D <-> NE C <-> NE B.
NE A
NE B NE D
NE C
Protection switching
Failure NE A
NE B NE D
NE C
Link
Blocked port
LAG
Link aggregation allows multiple links that are attached to the same equipment to be aggregated
to form a link aggregation group (LAG) so that the bandwidths and availability of the links
increase. The aggregated links can be considered as a single logical link.
The LAG provides the telecom operators with a cost-effective method of increasing the
link bandwidth. The operators obtain data links with higher bandwidths by combining
multiple physical links into one logical link without upgrading the existing equipment. The
bandwidth of the logical link is equal to the sum of the bandwidths of the physical links.
The aggregation module distributes the traffic to different members by using the load
sharing algorithm, thus realizing the load sharing function at the link level.
l Improves the link availability.
The links in a LAG provide backup to each other dynamically. When a link fails, another
link in the LAG quickly takes over. The process in which link aggregation starts the backup
link is related only to the links in the same LAG and is not related to the links that are not
in the LAG.
Link 1
Link 2
Ethernet Link 3 Ethernet
packet packet
Link aggregation
group
MSTP
The OptiX RTN 910 supports only the MSTP protocol that uses the common and internal
spanning tree (CIST). The MSTP that uses the CIST can be used as a rapid spanning tree protocol
(RSTP). The RSTP is applicable in the case of a network loop. This protocol adopts certain
algorithms to reconstruct a loop network into a loop-free tree network and thus prevents Ethernet
frames from increasing and cycling in an endless manner on the loop network.
In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, the MSTP is used to prevent a network loop on the access
side.
See Figure 5-18. When the user equipment accesses the OptiX RTN 910 through two different
trails, you can configure the ports on the OptiX RTN 910 that are connected to the user network
into a port group. This port group, together with the switch on the user network, can run the
MSTP. Hence, if a service access link becomes faulty, the MSTP enables a re-configuration to
generate the spanning tree topology, thus providing protection for the user network that is
configured with multiple access points.
Root Root
Port group
CIST
Blocked Port
5.1.10 QoS
The quality of service (QoS) refers to the ability of a communication network to ensure the
expected service quality in the aspects of the bandwidth, delay, delay jitter, and packet loss ratio,
and thus to ensure that the request and response from the user or the request and response from
the application meet the requirements of an expected service class. The OptiX RTN 910 supports
the following QoS functions, namely, differentiated service (DiffServ), flow classification,
CAR, traffic shaping, and queue scheduling.
DiffServ
DiffServ (DS) is an end-to-end QoS control model and performs the QoS processing function
as follows:
1. The DS edge node checks the QoS information carried by the packets that enter the DS
domain. Then, the DS edge node aggregates the packets that are at the same QoS levels
into the same behavior aggregates (BAs) and maps the BAs into corresponding per-hop
behavior (PHB) service class.
2. The DS edge node controls the traffic of the BAs according to the PHB service class, and
forwards the BAs to the DS interior node.
3. The DS internal node controls the traffic of the BAs according to the PHB service class,
and forwards the BAs to the DS edge node of the next hop.
The OptiX RTN 910 supports eight PHB service class, namely, BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. Packets can be mapped into the corresponding PHB level according to the
CVLAN priority, SVLAN priority, or DSCP value.
NOTE
l The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is
valid. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.
l In the case of a point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service, the OptiX RTN 910 supports only
mapping the PHB service classes according to the DSCP values in the Ethernet frames.
Flow Classification
The OptiX RTN 910 supports two flow classification methods, namely, simple flow
classification and complex flow classification. In the case of the simple flow classification,
different services on specified ports are mapped into different PHB service classes according to
the C-VLAN priority, S-VLAN priority, or DSCP value. In the case of the complex flow
classification, specified services mapped into different PHB service classes according to the
CVLAN/SVLAN ID, CVLAN/SVLAN priority, or DSCP value.
The OptiX RTN 910 supports the following complex flow types:
The flow can be further classified according to the combination of CVLAN ID+CVLAN priority
or SVLAN ID+SVLAN priority.
In the case of complex flows, the following QoS processing operations can be performed:
l Passes or discards the flow according the access control list (ACL).
l Maps the flow into a new PHB service class.
l In the ingress direction, restrict the rate of the flow by using the CAR.
l In the egress direction, perform the flow shaping.
CAR
The CAR is a type of traffic policing technology. When the CAR is used, the rate of the traffic
after flow classification is assessed in a certain period (including in the long term and in the short
term); the packet rate of which does not exceed the specified value is set to a high priority and
the packet rate of which exceeds the specified value is discarded or downgraded. In this manner,
the CAR restricts the traffic into the transmission network.
The OptiX RTN 910 supports the CAR processing for a complex flow in the ingress direction.
The CAR processing operations are as follows:
l When the rate of packets is lower than or equal to the preset committed information rate
(CIR), these packets are marked green and pass the policing of the CAR. These packets are
always forwarded first in the case of network congestion.
l When the rate of packets exceeds the preset peak information rate (PIR), these packets at
a rate higher than the PIR are marked red and directly discarded.
l When the rate of packets is higher than the CIR but is lower than the PIR, the packets at a
rate higher than the CIR can pass the restriction but are marked yellow. Yellow packets
can be set to "discard", "pass", or "remark". If packets are set to "remark", these packets
are mapped to another specified queue with a certain priority (that is, the priority of these
packets is changed) and then forwarded.
l When the rate of packets that pass the restriction of the CAR is lower than or equal to the
CIR in a certain period, certain packets can burst and these packets are always forwarded
first in the case of network congestion. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is
determined by the committed burst size (CBS).
l When the rate of packets that pass the restriction of the CAR is higher than the CIR but is
lower than or equal to the PIR, certain packets can burst and these packets are marked
yellow. The maximum traffic of the burst packets is determined by the peak burst size
(PBS).
Figure 5-19 shows the traffic change after the CAR processing. The packets that are marked
red are directly discarded, and the packets that are marked yellow and green pass the policing
of the CAR. In addition, the packets that are marked yellow are processed according to the preset
value.
MBS
PIR
CBS
CIR
MBS
PIR PIR
CBS
CIR CAR CIR
Traffic Shaping
When the traffic shaping function is used, the traffic and burst size of an outgoing connection
of a network can be restricted. In this manner, the packet can be transmitted at an even rate.
The OptiX RTN 910 supports the shaping of a complex flow, the PHB service class, or the port
in the egress direction.
Queue Scheduling
In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, each Ethernet port has eight egress queues, which correspond
to eight PHB service classes. The OptiX RTN 910 supports three queue scheduling methods,
namely, strict-priority (SP), weighted round robin (WRR), and SP+WRR.
l SP Scheduling Algorithm
Figure 5-20 shows the SP scheduling algorithm. During the SP queue scheduling, packets
are transmitted in a descending order of priority. When a queue with a higher priority is
empty, the packets in the queue with a lower priority can be transmitted. In this manner,
packets of key services are placed into the queues with higher priorities and packets of non-
key services (such as email services) are placed into queues with lower priorities. Hence,
the packets of key services can be always transmitted first, and the packets of non-key
services are transmitted when the data of key services is not processed.
When the SP queue scheduling algorithm is used, all the resources are used to ensure the
QoS of the services of the highest priority. If there are packets in the queues with higher
priorities when congestion occurs, the packets in the queues with lower priorities cannot
be transmitted all the time.
Queue 1 Lowest
Queue 1 10
In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, the SP+WRR scheduling algorithm is the default queue
scheduling mode for each Ethernet port. The queue priority levels are CS7, CS6, EF, AF4, AF3,
AF2, AF1, and BE in the descending order or priority. AF1 to AF4 are WRR queues. Except
for the default settings, the WRR queues and SP queues cannot be interleaved if you set the SP
+WRR scheduling algorithm manually.
Figure 5-23 Configuration flow chart (point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services)
Required Start
Optional
Configuring Ethernet
ports
Configuring LAGs
Configuring E-Line
services
Configuring QoS
Verifying Ethernet
service configurations
End
Operation Description
Operation Description
A.12.6.4 Optional.
Setting the
Advanced
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports
A.12.7.3 Optional.
Setting the When the IF_ETH port transmits an Ethernet service that
Advanced permits bit errors, such as a voice service or a video service,
Attributes you can set Error Frame Discard Enabled to Disabled.
of the
IF_ETH
Port
A.12.2.1 Required if the LAG is configured to protect the FE/GE ports or if the
Creating a Hybrid radio uses the N+0/XPIC configuration mode. Set the parameters
LAG as follows:
l Set LAG Type to the same value as the opposite equipment. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static for the equipment at both ends.
l The Hybrid/AM attributes must be set to the same value for the IF ports
in a LAG.
l In the case of FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as the
opposite equipment. If the LAG is configured only to provide
protection, it is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Non-
Sharing for the equipment at both ends. If the LAG is configured to
increase the bandwidth, it is recommended that you set Load Sharing
to Sharing for the equipment at both ends.
l When the Hybrid radio uses the N+0/XPIC configuration mode, set
Load Sharing to Sharing for the equipment at both ends.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as the opposite equipment.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive for the equipment at both
ends. This parameter is valid to only LAGs whose Load Sharing is set
to Non-Sharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as the opposite
equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes the default
value. This parameter is valid to only LAGs whose Load Sharing is set
to Sharing.
l It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value for the
main and slave ports of the LAGs at both ends. In this case, you can set
System Priority according to the actual requirements. It is
recommended that this parameter takes the default value. This
parameter is valid to only static LAGs.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Slave Ports according to
the planning information. It is recommended that you set this parameter
to the same value for the main and slave ports of the LAGs at both ends.
A.12.2.2 Optional.
Setting
Parameters for
LAGs
Table 5-12 Procedures for configuring point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services
Operation Description
A.12.3.3 Required when the VLAN tags of the Ethernet service need to be swapped
Creating a at the source and sink.
VLAN Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
Forwarding
NOTE
Table Item The corresponding VLAN forwarding table entries need to be configured for the
source port and sink port.
A.12.10.1 Required.
Creating a DS Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
Domain
NOTE
Point-to-point transparently transmitted services support mapping the PHB service
classes based on the DSCP type only. The default DS, however, maps the PHB
service classes according to the CLAN priorities. Therefore, you need to configure
a new DS.
A.12.10.4 Required when you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port
Creating a Port shaping for a specific port.
Policy Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
A.12.10.6 Required when you need to perform the CAR or shaping operation for a
Creating the specific flow over the port.
Traffic Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
A.12.10.8 Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
Configuring occupies.
Port Shaping Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
A.12.11.1 Required in the case of the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in
Creating an the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MD l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the two NEs.
l In the test of an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the
transport network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain
Level takes the default value 4. In the test of an Ethernet service between
two internal NEs on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain
Level to a value smaller than 4. In the test of an Ethernet service between
two Ethernet ports on the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to
a value smaller than the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service
between two internal NEs on the transport network.
A.12.11.2 Required in the case of the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in
Creating an the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MA l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance Domain
Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the two NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the two NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.
A.12.11.3 Required in the case of the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in
Creating an the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MEP Point l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l The MP ID is used to identify the MEP during the LB test. Therefore,
set CC Status to Active.
A.12.11.4 Required in the case of the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the
Creating OAM operation are located. Set the parameters as follows:
Remote MEPs l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance Domain
in an MA Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l If MEPs may initiate OAM operations to another MEP in the same MA,
set the MEPs to be remote MEPs.
Operation Description
perform an LB Required.
test to test the The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.
Ethernet
service
configurations
Optional
Configuring Ethernet
ports
Configuring LAGs
Configuring E-Line
services
Configuring QoS
Verifying Ethernet
service configurations
End
A.12.6.4 Optional.
Setting the
Advanced
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports
Operation Description
A.12.7.3 Optional.
Setting the When the IF_ETH port transmits an Ethernet service that
Advanced permits bit errors, such as a voice service or a video service,
Attributes you can set Error Frame Discard Enabled to Disabled.
of the
IF_ETH
Port
A.12.2.1 Required if the LAG is configured to protect the FE/GE ports or if the
Creating a Hybrid radio uses the N+0/XPIC configuration mode. Set the parameters
LAG as follows:
l Set LAG Type to the same value as the opposite equipment. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static for the equipment at both ends.
l The Hybrid/AM attribute must be set to the same value for the IF ports
in a LAG.
l In the case of FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as the
opposite equipment. If the LAG is configured only to realize protection,
it is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Non-Sharing for the
equipment at both ends. If the LAG is configured to increase the
bandwidth, it is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Sharing
for the equipment at both ends.
l When the Hybrid radio uses the N+0/XPIC configuration mode, set
Load Sharing to Sharing for the equipment at both ends.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as the opposite equipment.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive for the equipment at both
ends. This parameter is valid to only LAGs whose Load Sharing is set
to Non-Sharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as the opposite
equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter adopts the
default value. This parameter is valid to only LAGs whose Load
Sharing is set to Sharing.
l It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value for the
main and slave ports. In this case, you can set System Priority
according to the requirements. It is recommended that this parameter
adopts the default value. This parameter is valid only to static LAG.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Slave Ports according to
the planning information. It is recommended that you set this parameter
to the same values for the main and slave ports.
A.12.2.2 Optional.
Setting
Parameters for
LAGs
A.12.3.3 Required when the VLAN tags of the Ethernet service need to be switched
Creating a at the source and sink.
VLAN The parameters need to be set according to the network planning
Forwarding information.
Table Item
NOTE
The corresponding VLAN forwarding table items need to be configured for the
source port and sink port.
A.12.10.1 Required.
Creating a DS Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
Domain
NOTE
Point-to-point transparently transmitted services support mapping the PHB service
classes based on the DSCP type only. The default DS, however, maps the PHB
service classes according to the CLAN priorities. Therefore, you need to configure
a new DS.
A.12.10.4 Required when you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port
Creating a Port shaping for a specific port.
Policy Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
A.12.10.6 Required when you need to perform the CAR or shaping operation for a
Creating the specific flow over the port.
Traffic Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
Operation Description
A.12.10.8 Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
Configuring occupies.
Port Shaping Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
A.12.11.1 Required in the case of the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in
Creating an the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MD l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the two NEs.
l In the test of an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the
transport network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain
Level takes the default value 4. In the test of an Ethernet service between
two internal NEs on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain
Level to a value smaller than 4. In the test of an Ethernet service between
two Ethernet ports on the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to
a value smaller than the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service
between two internal NEs on the transport network.
A.12.11.2 Required in the case of the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in
Creating an the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MA l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance Domain
Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the two NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the two NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.
A.12.11.3 Required in the case of the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in
Creating an the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MEP Point l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l The MP ID is used to identify the MEP during the LB test. Therefore,
set CC Status to Active.
Operation Description
A.12.11.4 Required in the case of the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the
Creating OAM operation are located. Set the parameters as follows:
Remote MEPs l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance Domain
in an MA Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l If MEPs may initiate OAM operations to another MEP in the same MA,
set the MEPs to be remote MEPs.
perform an LB Required.
test to test the The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.
Ethernet
service
configurations
Optional
Configuring Ethernet
ports
Configuring LAGs
Configuring E-Line
services
Configuring QoS
Verifying Ethernet
service configurations
End
Setting the parameters of A.12.6.1 Setting the Required. Set the parameters
Ethernet ports General Attributes of as follows:
Ethernet Ports l In the case of used ports,
set Enable Port to
Enabled. In the case of
unused ports, set Enable
Port to Disabled.
l When jumbo frames are
transmitted, set Max
Frame Length(byte)
according to the actual
length of the jumbo
frames. Otherwise, it is
recommended that you set
Max Frame Length
(byte) to 1536.
Operation Description
A.12.2.1 Required if the LAG is configured to protect the FE/GE ports or if the
Creating a Hybrid radio uses the N+0/XPIC configuration mode. Set the parameters
LAG as follows:
l Set LAG Type to the same value as the opposite equipment. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static for the equipment at both ends.
l The Hybrid/AM attributes must be set to the same value for the IF ports
in a LAG.
l In the case of FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as the
opposite equipment. If the LAG is configured only to provide
protection, it is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Non-
Sharing for the equipment at both ends. If the LAG is configured to
increase the bandwidth, it is recommended that you set Load Sharing
to Sharing for the equipment at both ends.
l When the Hybrid radio uses the N+0/XPIC configuration mode, set
Load Sharing to Sharing for the equipment at both ends.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as the opposite equipment.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive for the equipment at both
ends. This parameter is valid to only LAGs whose Load Sharing is set
to Non-Sharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as the opposite
equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes the default
value. This parameter is valid to only LAGs whose Load Sharing is set
to Sharing.
l It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value for the
main and slave ports of the LAGs at both ends. In this case, you can set
System Priority according to the actual requirements. It is
recommended that this parameter takes the default value. This
parameter is valid to only static LAGs.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Slave Ports according to
the planning information. It is recommended that you set this parameter
to the same value for the main and slave ports of the LAGs at both ends.
A.12.2.2 Optional.
Setting
Parameters for
LAGs
A.12.3.1 Required.
Configuring Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
the QinQ Link
A.12.3.2 Required.
Configuring Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
the E-Line
Service
A.12.10.1 Required.
Creating a DS Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
Domain
NOTE
Point-to-point transparently transmitted services support mapping the PHB service
classes based on the DSCP type only. The default DS, however, maps the PHB
service classes according to the CLAN priorities. Therefore, you need to configure
a new DS.
A.12.10.4 Required when you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port
Creating a Port shaping for a specific port.
Policy Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
A.12.10.6 Required when you need to perform the CAR or shaping operation for a
Creating the specific flow over the port.
Traffic Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
A.12.10.8 Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
Configuring occupies.
Port Shaping Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
A.12.11.1 Required in the case of the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in
Creating an the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MD l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the two NEs.
l In the test of an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the
transport network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain
Level takes the default value 4. In the test of an Ethernet service between
two internal NEs on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain
Level to a value smaller than 4. In the test of an Ethernet service between
two Ethernet ports on the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to
a value smaller than the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service
between two internal NEs on the transport network.
A.12.11.2 Required in the case of the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in
Creating an the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MA l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance Domain
Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the two NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the two NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.
A.12.11.3 Required in the case of the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in
Creating an the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MEP Point l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l The MP ID is used to identify the MEP during the LB test. Therefore,
set CC Status to Active.
A.12.11.4 Required in the case of the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the
Creating OAM operation are located. Set the parameters as follows:
Remote MEPs l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance Domain
in an MA Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l If MEPs may initiate OAM operations to another MEP in the same MA,
set the MEPs to be remote MEPs.
Operation Description
perform an LB Required.
test to test the The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.
Ethernet
service
configurations
Optional
Configuring Ethernet ports
Configuring LAGs
Configuring QoS
End
A.12.6.4 Required when you need to enable the port self-loop test and
Setting the automatic loopback shutdown functions or to enable the
Advanced broadcast packet suppression function.
Attributes Set Loopback Check, Loopback Port Shutdown, Enabling
of Ethernet Broadcast Packet Suppression, and Broadcast Packet
Ports Suppression Threshold according to the actual
requirements.
Operation Description
A.12.7.3 Optional.
Setting the When the IF_ETH port transmits an Ethernet service that
Advanced permits bit errors, such as a voice service or a video service,
Attributes you can set Error Frame Discard Enabled to Disabled.
of the
IF_ETH
Port
A.12.2.1 Required if the LAG is configured to protect the FE/GE ports or if the
Creating a Hybrid radio uses the N+0/XPIC configuration mode. Set the parameters
LAG as follows:
l Set LAG Type to the same value as the opposite equipment. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static for the equipment at both ends.
l The Hybrid/AM attributes must be set to the same value for the IF ports
in a LAG.
l In the case of FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as the
opposite equipment. If the LAG is configured only to provide
protection, it is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Non-
Sharing for the equipment at both ends. If the LAG is configured to
increase the bandwidth, it is recommended that you set Load Sharing
to Sharing for the equipment at both ends.
l When the Hybrid radio uses the N+0/XPIC configuration mode, set
Load Sharing to Sharing for the equipment at both ends.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as the opposite equipment.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive for the equipment at both
ends. This parameter is valid to only LAGs whose Load Sharing is set
to Non-Sharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as the opposite
equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes the default
value. This parameter is valid to only LAGs whose Load Sharing is set
to Sharing.
l It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value for the
main and slave ports of the LAGs at both ends. In this case, you can set
System Priority according to the actual requirements. It is
recommended that this parameter takes the default value. This
parameter is valid to only static LAGs.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Slave Ports according to
the planning information. It is recommended that you set this parameter
to the same value for the main and slave ports of the LAGs at both ends.
Operation Description
A.12.2.2 Optional.
Setting
Parameters for
LAGs
Operation Description
A.12.1.2 Required if the values of the default parameters of the ERPS timers need
Setting the to be changed.
Parameters of Set Hold-Off Time(ms), Guard Time(ms), WTR Time(min), and
Ethernet Ring Packet Transmit Interval(s) according to the actual requirements. Set
Protocol these parameters to the same values for all the NEs on the network.
Operation Description
Operation Description
A.12.4.1 Required if you need to set certain MAC address entries not
Creating a to age.
Static MAC Set the parameters according to the network planning
Address information.
Entry
A.12.10.1 Required.
Creating a DS Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
Domain
NOTE
Point-to-point transparently transmitted services support mapping the PHB service
classes based on the DSCP type only. The default DS, however, maps the PHB
service classes according to the CLAN priorities. Therefore, you need to configure
a new DS.
A.12.10.4 Required when you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port
Creating a Port shaping for a specific port.
Policy Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
A.12.10.6 Required when you need to perform the CAR or shaping operation for a
Creating the specific flow over the port.
Traffic Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
A.12.10.8 Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
Configuring occupies.
Port Shaping Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
A.12.11.1 Required in the case of the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in
Creating an the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MD l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the two NEs.
l In the test of an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the
transport network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain
Level takes the default value 4. In the test of an Ethernet service between
two internal NEs on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain
Level to a value smaller than 4. In the test of an Ethernet service between
two Ethernet ports on the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to
a value smaller than the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service
between two internal NEs on the transport network.
A.12.11.2 Required in the case of the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in
Creating an the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MA l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance Domain
Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the two NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the two NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.
A.12.11.3 Required in the case of the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in
Creating an the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MEP Point l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l The MP ID is used to identify the MEP during the LB test. Therefore,
set CC Status to Active.
A.12.11.4 Required in the case of the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the
Creating OAM operation are located. Set the parameters as follows:
Remote MEPs l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance Domain
in an MA Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l If MEPs may initiate OAM operations to another MEP in the same MA,
set the MEPs to be remote MEPs.
Operation Description
perform an LB Required.
test to test the The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.
Ethernet
service
configurations
Optional
Configuring Ethernet ports
Configuring LAGs
Configuring QoS
End
The detailed information about the procedures in the flow chart is provided as follows.
Operation Description
A.12.6.4 Required when you need to enable the port self-loop test and
Setting the automatic loopback shutdown functions or to enable the
Advanced broadcast packet suppression function.
Attributes Set Loopback Check, Loopback Port Shutdown, Enabling
of Ethernet Broadcast Packet Suppression, and Broadcast Packet
Ports Suppression Threshold according to the requirements.
A.12.7.3 Optional.
Setting the When the IF_ETH port transmits an Ethernet service that
Advanced permits bit errors, such as a voice service or a video service,
Attributes you can set Error Frame Discard Enabled to Disabled.
of the
IF_ETH
Port
Operation Description
A.12.1.2 Required if the values of the default parameters of the ERPS timers need
Setting the to be changed.
Parameters of Set Hold-Off Time(ms), Guard Time(ms), WTR Time(min), and
Ethernet Ring Packet Transmit Interval(s) according to the actual requirements. Set
Protocol these parameters to the same values for all the NEs on the network.
A.12.2.1 Required if the LAG is configured to protect the FE/GE ports or if the
Creating a Hybrid radio uses the N+0/XPIC configuration mode. Set the parameters
LAG as follows:
l Set LAG Type to the same value as the opposite equipment. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static for the equipment at both ends.
l The Hybrid/AM attributes must be set to the same value for the IF ports
in a LAG.
l In the case of FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as the
opposite equipment. If the LAG is configured only to provide
protection, it is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Non-
Sharing for the equipment at both ends. If the LAG is configured to
increase the bandwidth, it is recommended that you set Load Sharing
to Sharing for the equipment at both ends.
l When the Hybrid radio uses the N+0/XPIC configuration mode, set
Load Sharing to Sharing for the equipment at both ends.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as the opposite equipment.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive for the equipment at both
ends. This parameter is valid to only LAGs whose Load Sharing is set
to Non-Sharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as the opposite
equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes the default
value. This parameter is valid to only LAGs whose Load Sharing is set
to Sharing.
l It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value for the
main and slave ports of the LAGs at both ends. In this case, you can set
System Priority according to the actual requirements. It is
recommended that this parameter takes the default value. This
parameter is valid to only static LAGs.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Slave Ports according to
the planning information. It is recommended that you set this parameter
to the same value for the main and slave ports of the LAGs at both ends.
Operation Description
A.12.2.2 Optional.
Setting
Parameters for
LAGs
A.12.4.1 Required if you need to set certain MAC address entries not
Creating a to age.
Static MAC Set the parameters according to the network planning
Address information.
Entry
A.12.10.1 Required.
Creating a DS Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
Domain
NOTE
Point-to-point transparently transmitted services support mapping the PHB service
classes based on the DSCP type only. The default DS, however, maps the PHB
service classes according to the CLAN priorities. Therefore, you need to configure
a new DS.
A.12.10.4 Required when you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port
Creating a Port shaping for a specific port.
Policy Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
A.12.10.6 Required when you need to perform the CAR or shaping operation for a
Creating the specific flow over the port.
Traffic Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
A.12.10.8 Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
Configuring occupies.
Port Shaping Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
A.12.11.1 Required in the case of the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in
Creating an the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MD l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the two NEs.
l In the test of an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the
transport network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain
Level takes the default value 4. In the test of an Ethernet service between
two internal NEs on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain
Level to a value smaller than 4. In the test of an Ethernet service between
two Ethernet ports on the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to
a value smaller than the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service
between two internal NEs on the transport network.
Operation Description
A.12.11.2 Required in the case of the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in
Creating an the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MA l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance Domain
Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the two NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the two NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.
A.12.11.3 Required in the case of the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in
Creating an the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MEP Point l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l The MP ID is used to identify the MEP during the LB test. Therefore,
set CC Status to Active.
A.12.11.4 Required in the case of the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the
Creating OAM operation are located. Set the parameters as follows:
Remote MEPs l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance Domain
in an MA Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l If MEPs may initiate OAM operations to another MEP in the same MA,
set the MEPs to be remote MEPs.
perform an LB Required.
test to test the The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.
Ethernet
service
configurations
Optional
Configuring Ethernet ports
Configuring LAGs
Configuring QoS
End
The detailed information about the procedures in the flow chart is provided as follows.
A.12.6.4 Required when you need to enable the port self-loop test and
Setting the automatic loopback shutdown functions or to enable the
Advanced broadcast packet suppression function.
Attributes Set Loopback Check, Loopback Port Shutdown, Enabling
of Ethernet Broadcast Packet Suppression, and Broadcast Packet
Ports Suppression Threshold according to the requirements.
Operation Description
A.12.7.3 Optional.
Setting the When the IF_ETH port transmits an Ethernet service that
Advanced permits bit errors, such as a voice service or a video service,
Attributes you can set Error Frame Discard Enabled to Disabled.
of the
IF_ETH
Port
A.12.1.2 Required if the values of the default parameters of the ERPS timers need
Setting the to be changed.
Parameters of Set Hold-Off Time(ms), Guard Time(ms), WTR Time(min), and
Ethernet Ring Packet Transmit Interval(s) according to the actual requirements. Set
Protocol these parameters to the same values for all the NEs on the network.
A.12.2.1 Required if the LAG is configured to protect the FE/GE ports or if the
Creating a Hybrid radio uses the N+0/XPIC configuration mode. Set the parameters
LAG as follows:
l Set LAG Type to the same value as the opposite equipment. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static for the equipment at both ends.
l The Hybrid/AM attributes must be set to the same value for the IF ports
in a LAG.
l In the case of FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as the
opposite equipment. If the LAG is configured only to provide
protection, it is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Non-
Sharing for the equipment at both ends. If the LAG is configured to
increase the bandwidth, it is recommended that you set Load Sharing
to Sharing for the equipment at both ends.
l When the Hybrid radio uses the N+0/XPIC configuration mode, set
Load Sharing to Sharing for the equipment at both ends.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as the opposite equipment.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive for the equipment at both
ends. This parameter is valid to only LAGs whose Load Sharing is set
to Non-Sharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as the opposite
equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes the default
value. This parameter is valid to only LAGs whose Load Sharing is set
to Sharing.
l It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value for the
main and slave ports of the LAGs at both ends. In this case, you can set
System Priority according to the actual requirements. It is
recommended that this parameter takes the default value. This
parameter is valid to only static LAGs.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Slave Ports according to
the planning information. It is recommended that you set this parameter
to the same value for the main and slave ports of the LAGs at both ends.
A.12.2.2 Optional.
Setting
Parameters for
LAGs
A.12.4.1 Required if you need to set certain MAC address entries not
Creating a to age.
Static MAC Set the parameters according to the network planning
Address information.
Entry
A.12.10.1 Required.
Creating a DS Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
Domain
NOTE
Point-to-point transparently transmitted services support mapping the PHB service
classes based on the DSCP type only. The default DS, however, maps the PHB
service classes according to the CLAN priorities. Therefore, you need to configure
a new DS.
A.12.10.4 Required when you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port
Creating a Port shaping for a specific port.
Policy Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
A.12.10.6 Required when you need to perform the CAR or shaping operation for a
Creating the specific flow over the port.
Traffic Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
A.12.10.8 Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
Configuring occupies.
Port Shaping Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
A.12.11.1 Required in the case of the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in
Creating an the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MD l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the two NEs.
l In the test of an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the
transport network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain
Level takes the default value 4. In the test of an Ethernet service between
two internal NEs on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain
Level to a value smaller than 4. In the test of an Ethernet service between
two Ethernet ports on the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to
a value smaller than the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service
between two internal NEs on the transport network.
Operation Description
A.12.11.2 Required in the case of the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in
Creating an the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MA l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance Domain
Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the two NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the two NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.
A.12.11.3 Required in the case of the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in
Creating an the service test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
MEP Point l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l The MP ID is used to identify the MEP during the LB test. Therefore,
set CC Status to Active.
A.12.11.4 Required in the case of the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the
Creating OAM operation are located. Set the parameters as follows:
Remote MEPs l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance Domain
in an MA Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l If MEPs may initiate OAM operations to another MEP in the same MA,
set the MEPs to be remote MEPs.
perform an LB Required.
test to test the The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.
Ethernet
service
configurations
To meet the preceding requirements, point-to-point transparently transmitted E-line services are
configured; in addition, corresponding QoS processing is configured.
Backhaul network
The connections of Ethernet links shown in Figure 5-29 are described as follows.
Between NE1 and the BTS 7-EM4T-1 Configure this port to access
services from the BTS.
Ethernet Port
Table 5-44 provides the information about the Ethernet port involved in the service.
NOTE
l In this example, the GE port on the BTS works in the auto-negotiation mode. Hence, the FE port that accesses
the BTS must work in the auto-negotiation mode. If the peer Ethernet port works in another mode, the local
Ethernet port must work in the same mode. The working modes of the Ethernet ports inside the network are
planned as auto-negotiation.
l In this example, to ensure that the Ethernet frames that carry more than one tag such as QinQ can traverse
the equipment, the maximum frame length is set to 1536 (bytes). If the equipment needs to transmit jumbo
frames with a greater length, set the maximum frame length according to the actual length of a jumbo frame.
l Generally, the flow control function is enabled only when the NE or the peer equipment is inadequate for
QoS processing. The flow control planning on the NE must match the flowing control planning on the peer
equipment.
NOTE
The majority of the backhaul services on the BTS are Internet services. Hence, the error frame discarding function
needs to be enabled.
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-UNI
Parameter NE1
QoS (Diffserv)
DS is the basis for QoS. It is recommended that the VLAN priority or DSCP value of the BTS
services be allocated according to the service type. Then, the transmission network creates the
corresponding DS domain according to the allocated VLAN priority or DSCP value. Each
Ethernet port involved in the service must use the same DS configuration.
In this example, the BTS services are allocated with corresponding DSCP values according to
the service type, and the NEs allocate the PHB service classes according to the DSCP value, as
shown in Table 5-47. Each Ethernet port involved in the service uses the same DS configuration.
CS7 56 -
CS6 48 -
AF4 32 -
AF1 8 -
NOTE
During the mapping of the PHB service class, CS7 is not recommended, because CS7 may be used to transmit
Ethernet protocol packets or inband DCN packets on the NE.
CS7 SP
CS6 SP
EF SP
BE SP
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.6.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports and set the general attributes
of the Ethernet port.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1
Step 2 See A.12.7.1 Setting the General Attributes of the IF_ETH Port and set the general attributes
of the IF_ETH port.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.3.2 Configuring the E-Line Service and configure the E-Line services.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-UNI
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.10.1 Creating a DS Domain and create a DS domain.
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
Parameter Value
Mapping Relation ID 2
Parameter Value
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the Ingress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.
0 BE
8 AF11
16 AF21
24 AF31
32 AF41
40 EF
48 CS6
56 CS7
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the Egress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.
BE 0
AF11 8
AF21 16
AF31 24
AF41 32
EF 40
CS6 48
CS7 56
NOTE
The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid.
In this example, the AF11 is used. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the Application Port tab page are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Step 2 See A.12.10.4 Creating a Port Policy to create the port policy.
Parameter Value
Policy ID 1
Step 3 See A.12.10.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy and set the ports that use the port
policy.
Parameter Value
Port_Comm
Port 7-EM4F-3
3-IFU2-1
----End
Context
NOTE
This section describes how to configure the point-to-point transparently transmitted Ethernet service on NE1
and how to configure the ETH OAM data on NE2 for testing the Ethernet service.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.11.1 Creating an MD and create an MD.
Parameter Value
NE1 NE2
Maintenance Domain 3 3
Level
Parameter Value
NE1 NE2
NOTE
a: BSCtoBTS_Tline is the name of the point-to-point Ethernet service that is transparently transmitted from NE2
to NE1. The service ID is 1.
Step 3 See A.12.11.3 Creating an MEP Point and create MEP points.
Parameter Value
NE1 NE2
Parameter Value
NE1 NE2
VLAN - -
MP ID 101 102
Parameter Value
NE1 NE2
Step 5 See perform an LB test to test the Ethernet service configurations and test the E-Line service.
Use MP 101 as the source maintenance point and MP 102 as the sink maintenance point to
perform the LB test.
----End
Based on 3.5 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid Radio Chain Network),
configure Ethernet services according to the following requirements:
To meet the preceding requirements, VLAN-based E-Line services are configured for service
transmission on each NE; in addition, corresponding LAG protection and QoS processing are
configured.
FE
GE GE
FE NE4
BTS3
20 Mbit/s FE
VLAN 120-129
NE3 NE2 NE1 BSC
120 Mbit/s
VLAN 100-149
FE BTS1
FE 45 Mbti/s
NE6 NE5 VLAN 100-109
BTS4
BTS5 25 Mbit/s
15 Mbit/s VLAN 130-139
VLAN 140-149
The connections of Ethernet links shown in Figure 5-30 are described as follows.
Between NE1 and 7-EM4F-3 Main port of a LAG Configure these ports
the BSC into a load non-
7-EM4F-4 Slave port of a LAG sharing LAG,
therefore improving
link reliability.
Ethernet Ports
Table 5-55 to Table 5-60 provide the information about each Ethernet port involved in the
service.
NOTE
l In this example, the FE ports on all the BTSs work in the auto-negotiation mode. Hence, the FE port of each
NE that accesses services must work in the auto-negotiation mode. If the peer Ethernet port works in another
mode, the local Ethernet port must work in the same mode. The working modes of the Ethernet ports inside
the network are planned as auto-negotiation.
l In this example, to ensure that the Ethernet frames that carry more than one tag such as QinQ can traverse
the equipment, the maximum frame length is set to 1536 (bytes). If the equipment needs to transmit jumbo
frames with a greater length, set the maximum frame length according to the actual length of a jumbo frame.
l Generally, the flow control function is enabled only when the NE or the peer equipment is inadequate for
QoS processing. The flow control planning on the NE must match the flowing control planning on the peer
equipment.
l In this example, all the services carry VLAN tags. Therefore, the tag attributes of all the ports are tag-aware.
NOTE
The majority of the backhaul services on the BTS are the Internet services. Hence, the error frame discarding
function needs to be enabled.
Parameter NE1
NOTE
In this example, the bandwidth of the Ethernet service to be transmitted is 120 Mbit/s, much smaller than the
bandwidth of a GE port. Therefore, you need not configure the link aggregation group to the load sharing mode
to increase the bandwidth.
Table 5-68 to Table 5-73 provide the detailed service planning information.
Parameter NE1
NE2 to BSC
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-UNI
Parameter NE2
Service ID 1 2
Parameter NE2
Service ID 1 2
Service ID 1 2
Parameter NE4
Parameter NE5
Service ID 1 2
Parameter NE6
BTS5 to NE5
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-UNI
QoS (Diffserv)
DS is the basis for QoS. It is recommended that the VLAN priority or DSCP value of the BTS
services be allocated by the service type. Then, the transmission network creates the
corresponding DS domain according to the allocated VLAN priority or DSCP value. Each
Ethernet port involved in the service must use the same DS configuration.
In this example, the BTS services are allocated with corresponding VLAN priorities according
to the service type, and the NEs allocate the PHB service classes according to the VLAN priority,
as provided in Table 5-74. Each Ethernet port involved in the service uses the same DS
configuration.
CS7 7 -
CS6 6 -
AF4 4 -
AF1 1 -
NOTE
During the mapping of the PHB service class, CS7 is not recommended, because CS7 may be used to transmit
Ethernet protocol packets or inband DCN packets on the NE.
Table 5-75 lists the queue scheduling mode used by each Ethernet port involved in the service
in this example.
CS7 SP
CS6 SP
EF SP
BE SP
NOTE
The CBS/PBS is in direct proportion to the CIR/PIR. That is, the larger the value of the CBS/PBS, the more the
burst packets are permitted. In this example, the values of the CBS and the PBS are set according to the bytes
that are transmitted at CIR and PIR during a 100 ms period.
service traffic that travels to the aggregation node, thus preventing congestion at the aggregation
node.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.6.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports and set the general attributes
of Ethernet ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4F-3 7-EM4F-4
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1 7-EM4T-3
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1 7-EM4T-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1 7-EM4T-2
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1
Step 2 See A.12.6.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports and set the Layer 2 attributes
of Ethernet ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4F-3 7-EM4F-4
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
7-EM4T-1 7-EM4T-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1 7-EM4T-2
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1
Step 3 See A.12.7.1 Setting the General Attributes of the IF_ETH Port and set the general attributes
of IF_ETH ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1
Step 4 See A.12.7.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of the IF_ETH Port and set the Layer 2 attributes
of IF_ETH ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.2.1 Creating a LAG and create the LAG for NE1.
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the Port Settings tab page are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.3.2 Configuring the E-Line Service and configure the E-Line services.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE2 to BTS
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-UNI
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1 2
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1 2
Parameter Value
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1 2
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1 2
Parameter Value
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
BTS5 to NE5
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-UNI
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.10.1 Creating a DS Domain and create a DS domain.
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
Parameter Value
Mapping Relation ID 2
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Ingress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.
0 BE
1 AF11
2 AF21
3 AF31
4 AF41
5 EF
6 CS6
7 CS7
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Egress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.
BE 0
AF11 1
AF21 2
AF31 3
AF41 4
EF 5
CS6 6
CS7 7
NOTE
The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid.
In this example, the AF11 is used. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Application Port tab page are
provided as follows.
Paramete Value
r
NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE5 NE6
NOTE
The mapping relation defined in the default DS domain is the same as the mapping relation defined in the DS
domain that is created in this step. Therefore, you can skip this step.
Step 2 See A.12.10.4 Creating a Port Policy and create the port policy.
l The values for the related parameters of NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Policy ID 1 2
Grooming Police After SP (CS7, CS6, and EF) SP (CS7, CS6, and EF)
Reloading WRR (AF4 to AF1) WRR (AF4 to AF1)
SP (BE) SP (BE)
Bandwidth Limit Disabled (for all PHB Disabled (for all PHB
service classes) service classes)
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 and NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Policy ID 1
Step 3 See A.12.10.6 Creating the Traffic and create the traffic on NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6.
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
Parameter Value
Traffic Classification ID 1
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the INGRESS tab page are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Match Value 2
Wildcard 0
CoS -
CIR(kbit/s) 4096
PIR(kbit/s) 8192
CBS(byte) 51200
PBS(byte) 102400
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the EGRESS tab page are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Step 4 See A.12.10.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy and set the ports that use the port
policy.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Port 3-IFU2-1
7-EM4F-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Port 3-IFU2-1
4-IFU2-1
7-EM4T-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.11.1 Creating an MD and configure the MD for NE1, NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Maintenanc 4 4 4 4 4
e Domain
Level
Step 2 See A.12.11.2 Creating an MA and create the maintenance association (MA) for NE1, NE2,
NE4, NE5, and NE6.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Relevant 1- 1- 1- 1- 1-
Service NE2toBSC_ NE2toBSC_ NE2toBSC_ NE2toBSC_ NE2toBSC_
Vline Vline Vline Vline Vline
Parameter Value
CC Test 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Transmit
Period
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Step 3 See A.12.11.3 Creating an MEP Point and create the MEP for NE1, NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Board 7-EM4T
Port 7-EM4T-1
VLAN 100
MP ID 201
Direction Ingress
CC Status Active
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Parameter Value
MP ID 401 402
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Board 7-EM4T
Port 7-EM4T-1
VLAN 130
MP ID 501
Direction Ingress
CC Status Active
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Board 7-EM4T
Port 7-EM4T-1
VLAN 140
MP ID 601
Direction Ingress
CC Status Active
Step 4 See A.12.11.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA and create the remote MEP points for NE1,
NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6.
The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Step 5 See perform an LB test to test the Ethernet service configurations and test the E-Line services
on NE1.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 101 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 201 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 102 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 401 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 103 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 402 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 104 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 501 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 105 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 601 as the sink MEP.
There should be no packets lost during the LB tests.
----End
Based on 3.5 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid Radio Chain Network),
configure Ethernet services according to the following actual requirements:
l The maximum Ethernet bandwidth is specified for each BTS/BSC on the network.
l GE links to the BSC are configured with LAG protection.
l The VLANs used by the services on a BTS must allocated by the BTS. Therefore, the
VLANs of services on different BTSes may be the same. To solve this problem, the BSC
allocates an S-VLAN tag for each BTS, and the S-VLAN IDs on the entire network are
planned in a unified manner.
l VLAN priorities are configured on each BTS according to service types.
To meet the preceding requirements, QinQ-based E-Line services are configured for service
transmission on each NE; in addition, corresponding LAG protection and QoS processing are
configured.
FE
GE GE
FE NE4
BTS3
20 Mbit/s FE
S-VLAN 120
NE3 NE2 NE1
BSC
120 Mbit/s
FE BTS1 S-VLAN 100, 110,120,130,140
FE 45 Mbit/s
NE6 NE5 S-VLAN 100
BTS4
BTS5 25 Mbit/s
15 Mbit/s S-VLAN 130
S-VLAN 140
NOTE
The connections of Ethernet links shown in Figure 5-31 are described as follows.
Between NE1 and 7-EM4F-3 Main port of a LAG Configure these ports
the BSC into a load non-
7-EM4F-4 Slave port of a LAG sharing LAG,
therefore improving
link reliability.
Ethernet Port
Table 5-83 to Table 5-88 provide the information about each Ethernet port involved in the
service.
NOTE
l If the Ethernet services on each BTS do not contain any untagged frames, you can set Encapsulation
Type to 802.1Q and set Tag to Tag Aware for the FE port that accesses the Ethernet services on each BTS.
l In this example, the FE ports on all the BTSs work in the auto-negotiation mode. Hence, the FE port of each
NE that accesses services must work in the auto-negotiation mode. If the peer Ethernet port works in another
mode, the local Ethernet port must work in the same mode. The working modes of the Ethernet ports inside
the network are planned as auto-negotiation.
l In this example, to ensure that the Ethernet frames that carry more than one tag such as QinQ can traverse
the equipment, the maximum frame length is set to 1536 (bytes). If the equipment needs to transmit jumbo
frames with a greater length, set the maximum frame length according to the actual length of a jumbo frame.
l Generally, the flow control function is enabled only when the NE or the peer equipment is inadequate for
QoS processing. The flow control planning on the NE must match the flowing control planning on the peer
equipment.
l In this example, the SVLAN T-PID that the BSC can identify is 0x8100. Hence, you need to set QinQ Type
Domain to 0x8100 for the two GE ports connecting to the BSC. The other NNI ports connect to internal
equipment. Hence, you need to set QinQ Type Domain to 0x88a8 for the other NNI ports.
Parameter 3-IFU2-1
Tag 0x88a8
Parameter 3-IFU2-1
Tag 0x88a8
NOTE
l The IF_ETH ports connect to internal equipment. Hence, you need to set QinQ Type Domain to 0x88a8
for the IF_ETH ports.
l The majority of the backhaul services on the BTS are Internet services. Hence, the error frame discarding
function needs to be enabled.
To improve the reliability of service transmission, NE1 and the BSC are interconnected through
the LAG formed by two GE links. Table 5-95 provides the planning information.
Parameter NE1
Parameter NE1
NOTE
In this example, the bandwidth of the Ethernet service to be transmitted is 120 Mbit/s, much smaller than the
bandwidth of a GE port. Therefore, you need not configure the link aggregation group to the load sharing mode
to increase the bandwidth.
Table 5-96 to Table 5-101 provide the detailed service planning information.
Parameter NE1
Service ID 1 2 3 4 5
Source Port - - - - -
Source C- - - - - -
VLANs
Parameter NE1
Service ID 1 2 3 4 5
Source C- Blank - - - -
VLANs
Service ID 1 2 3 4
Source Port - - - -
Source C- - - - -
VLANs
Service ID 1 2
Service ID 1 2
BTS5 to NE5
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-NNI
QoS (Diffserv)
DS is the basis for QoS. It is recommended that the VLAN priority or DSCP value of the BTS
services be allocated by the service type. Then, the transmission network creates the
corresponding DS domain according to the allocated VLAN priority or DSCP value. Each
Ethernet port involved in the service must use the same DS configuration.
In this example, the BTS services are allocated with corresponding VLAN priorities according
to the service type, and the NEs allocate the PHB service classes according to the VLAN priority,
as provided in Table 5-102. Each Ethernet port involved in the service uses the same DS
configuration.
CS7 7 -
CS6 6 -
AF4 4 -
AF1 1 -
NOTE
During the mapping of the PHB service class, CS7 is not recommended, because CS7 may be used to transmit
Ethernet protocol packets or inband DCN packets on the NE.
Table 5-103 lists the queue scheduling mode used by each Ethernet port involved in the service
in this example.
CS7 SP
CS6 SP
EF SP
BE SP
In this example, the shaping processing needs to be performed in the uplink direction (from the
BTS to the BSC) of the real-time OM and HSDPA services on each BTS. Table 5-105 lists the
shaping parameters.
Parameter Value
NOTE
The CBS/PBS is in direct proportion to the CIR/PIR. That is, the larger the value of the CBS/PBS, the more the
burst packets are permitted. In this example, the values of the CBS and the PBS are set according to the bytes
that are transmitted at CIR and PIR during a 100 ms period.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.6.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports and set the general attributes
of Ethernet ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4F-3 7-EM4F-4
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1 7-EM4T-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1 7-EM4T-2
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1
Step 2 See A.12.6.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports and set Layer 2 attributes of
Ethernet ports for NE1.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4F-3 7-EM4F-4
Step 3 See A.12.7.1 Setting the General Attributes of the IF_ETH Port and set the general attributes
of IF_ETH ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.2.1 Creating a LAG and create the LAG for NE1.
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
Parameter Value
Parameter Value
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the Port Settings tab page are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.3.1 Configuring the QinQ Link and configure a QinQ link.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
QinQ Link ID Board Port S-Vlan ID
1 7-EM4F 3 100
2 7-EM4F 3 110
3 7-EM4F 3 120
4 7-EM4F 3 130
5 7-EM4F 3 140
6 3-IFU2 1 100
7 3-IFU2 1 110
8 3-IFU2 1 120
9 3-IFU2 1 130
10 3-IFU2 1 140
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
1 3-IFU2 1 100
2 3-IFU2 1 110
3 3-IFU2 1 120
4 3-IFU2 1 130
5 3-IFU2 1 140
6 7-EM4T 3 110
7 7-EM4T 3 120
8 7-EM4T 3 130
9 7-EM4T 3 140
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
1 7-EM4T 3 110
2 7-EM4T 3 120
3 7-EM4T 3 130
4 7-EM4T 3 140
5 3-IFU2 1 110
6 3-IFU2 1 120
7 4-IFU2 1 130
8 4-IFU2 1 140
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
1 3-IFU2 1 110
2 3-IFU2 1 120
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
1 4-IFU2 1 130
2 4-IFU2 1 140
3 3-IFU2 1 140
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
QinQ Link ID Board Port S-Vlan ID
1 3-IFU2 1 140
Step 2 See A.12.3.2 Configuring the E-Line Service and configure the E-Line services.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1 2 3 4 5
QinQ Link 6 7 8 9 10
ID 1
QinQ Link 1 2 3 4 5
ID 2
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1 2 3 4 5
Parameter Value
Source Blank - - - -
VLANs
QinQ Link 1 - - - -
ID
QinQ Link - 6 7 8 9
ID 1
QinQ Link - 2 3 4 5
ID 2
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1 2 3 4
QinQ Link ID 5 6 7 8
1
QinQ Link ID 1 2 3 4
2
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1 2
Parameter Value
QinQ Link ID 1 2
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1 2
QinQ Link ID 1 -
QinQ Link ID 1 - 3
QinQ Link ID 2 - 2
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
BTS5 to NE5
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-NNI
QinQ Link ID 1
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.10.1 Creating a DS Domain and create a DS domain.
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
Parameter Value
Mapping Relation ID 2
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Ingress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.
0 0 BE
1 1 AF11
2 2 AF21
3 3 AF31
4 4 AF41
5 5 EF
6 6 CS6
7 7 CS7
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Egress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.
BE 0 0
AF11 1 1
AF21 2 2
AF31 3 3
AF41 4 4
EF 5 5
CS6 6 6
CS7 7 7
NOTE
The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid.
In this example, the AF11 is used. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Application Port tab page are
provided as follows.
Paramete Value
r
NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE5 NE6
Step 2 See A.12.10.3 Changing the Ports That Use the DS Domain and change the ports that use the
DS domain.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
3-IFU2-1 SVLAN
7-EM4F-3 SVLAN
SVLAN
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
7-EM4T-1 CVLAN
7-EM4T-3 SVLAN
3-IFU2-1 SVLAN
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
3-IFU2-1 SVLAN
4-IFU2-1 SVLAN
7-EM4T-3 SVLAN
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
7-EM4T-1 CVLAN
7-EM4T-2 CVLAN
3-IFU2-1 SVLAN
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
3-IFU2-1 SVLAN
4-IFU2-1 SVLAN
7-EM4T-1 cvlan
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
3-IFU2-1 SVLAN
7-EM4T-1 CVLAN
Step 3 See A.12.10.4 Creating a Port Policy and create the port policy.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 and NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Policy ID 1
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 and NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Policy ID 1 2 3
Grooming Police SP (CS7, CS6, and SP (CS7, CS6, and SP (CS7, CS6, and
After Reloading EF) EF) EF)
WRR (AF4 to AF1) WRR (AF4 to AF1) WRR (AF4 to AF1)
SP (BE) SP (BE) SP (BE)
Bandwidth Limit Disabled (for all Disabled (for all Disabled (for all
PHB service PHB service PHB service
classes) classes) classes)
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 and NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Policy ID 1 2
Grooming Police After SP (CS7, CS6, and EF) SP (CS7, CS6, and EF)
Reloading WRR (AF4 to AF1) WRR (AF4 to AF1)
SP (BE) SP (BE)
Bandwidth Limit Disabled (for all PHB Disabled (for all PHB
service classes) service classes)
Step 4 See A.12.10.6 Creating the Traffic and create the traffic for NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6.
l Parameters of NE2
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Traffic Classification ID 1 1
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the INGRESS tab page are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
CoS - -
CIR(kbit/s) 4096 -
PIR(kbit/s) 8192 -
CBS(byte) 51200 -
PBS(byte) 102400 -
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the EGRESS tab page are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
CIR(kbit/s) - 2048
Parameter Value
PIR(kbit/s) - 4096
CBS(byte) - 25600
PBS(byte) - 51200
l Parameters of NE4
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Traffic 1 1 2
Classification ID
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the INGRESS tab page are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
CoS - - -
CIR(kbit/s) 4096 - -
PIR(kbit/s) 8192 - -
CBS(byte) 51200 - -
PBS(byte) 102400 - -
Parameter Value
Handling Discard - -
Mode (red)
Remark
(yellow)
Pass (green)
Relabeled - (red) - -
CoS EF (yellow)
- (green)
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the EGRESS tab page are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
l Parameters of NE5
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Traffic Classification ID 1 1
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the INGRESS tab page are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
CoS - -
CIR(kbit/s) 4096 -
PIR(kbit/s) 8192 -
CBS(byte) 51200 -
PBS(byte) 102400 -
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the EGRESS tab page are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
CIR(kbit/s) - 2048
PIR(kbit/s) - 4096
CBS(byte) - 25600
PBS(byte) - 51200
l Parameters of NE6:
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Traffic Classification ID 1 1
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the INGRESS tab page are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
CoS - -
CIR(kbit/s) 4096 -
PIR(kbit/s) 8192 -
CBS(byte) 51200 -
PBS(byte) 102400 -
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the EGRESS tab page are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
CIR(kbit/s) - 2048
Parameter Value
PIR(kbit/s) - 4096
CBS(byte) - 25600
PBS(byte) - 51200
Step 5 See A.12.10.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy and set the ports that use the port
policy.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Port 3-IFU2-1
7-EM4F-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Port 3-IFU2-1
4-IFU2-1
7-EM4T-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.11.1 Creating an MD and configure the MD for NE1, NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6.
Parameter Value
Maintenanc 4 4 4 4 4
e Domain
Level
Step 2 See A.12.11.2 Creating an MA and create the MA for NE1, NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Parameter Value
Relevant 1- 2- 3- 4- 5-
Service BTS1_Qlin BTS2_Qlin BTS3_Qlin BTS4_Qlin BTS5_Qlin
e e e e e
CC Test 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Transmit
Period
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Step 3 See A.12.11.3 Creating an MEP Point and create the MEP for NE1, NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Board 7-EM4T
Port 7-EM4T-1
VLAN -
MP ID 201
Direction Ingress
CC Status Active
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
VLAN - -
MP ID 401 402
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Board 7-EM4T
Port 7-EM4T-1
VLAN -
MP ID 501
Direction Ingress
CC Status Active
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Board 7-EM4T
Port 7-EM4T-1
VLAN -
MP ID 601
Direction Ingress
Parameter Value
CC Status Active
Step 4 See A.12.11.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA and create the remote MEP points for NE1,
NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6.
The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Step 5 See perform an LB test to test the Ethernet service configurations and test the E-Line services
on NE1.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 101 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 201 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 102 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 401 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 103 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 402 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 104 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 501 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 105 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 601 as the sink MEP.
There should be no packets lost during the LB tests.
----End
To meet the preceding requirements, IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN services are configured
to implement transmission of the BTS services; in addition, corresponding LAG protection,
ERPS protection, and QoS processing are configured. See Figure 5-32.
FE
FE
FE
ERPS
FE
NE3
802.1d bridge BTS3
10 Mbit/s
The connections of Ethernet links shown in Figure 5-32 are described as follows.
Between NE1 and 7-EM4T-3 Main port of a LAG Configure these ports
the BSC into a load non-
sharing LAG,
Between NE1 and 4-IFU2-1 East port of an ERPS Configure this port to
NE2 ring node transmit Ethernet
services on Hybrid
radio.
Between NE2 and 4-IFU2-1 East port of an ERPS Configure this port to
NE3 ring node transmit Ethernet
services on Hybrid
radio.
Between NE4 and 4-IFU2-1 East port of an ERPS Configure this port to
NE1 ring node transmit Ethernet
services on Hybrid
radio.
Ethernet Port
Table 5-110 to Table 5-113 provide the information about each Ethernet port involved in the
service.
Broadcast Packet - -
Suppression Threshold
Broadcast Packet - -
Suppression Threshold
NOTE
l In this example, the FE/GE port on the BTS/BSC works in the auto-negotiation mode. Hence, the FE/GE
port of each NE that accesses services must work in the auto-negotiation mode. If the peer Ethernet port
works in another mode, the local Ethernet port must work in the same mode. The working modes of the
Ethernet ports inside the network are planned as auto-negotiation.
l In this example, to ensure that the Ethernet frames that carry more than one tag such as QinQ can traverse
the equipment, the maximum frame length is set to 1536 (bytes). If the equipment needs to transmit jumbo
frames with a greater length, set the maximum frame length according to the actual length of a jumbo frame.
l Generally, the flow control function is enabled only when the NE or the peer equipment is inadequate for
QoS processing. The flow control planning on the NE must match the flowing control planning on the peer
equipment.
l In this example, the loopback check, loopback port shutdown, and broadcast packet suppression functions
need not be enabled.
NOTE
The majority of the backhaul services on the BTS are Internet services. Hence, the error frame discarding function
needs to be enabled.
LAG
To improve the reliability of service transmission, NE1 and the BSC are interconnected through
the LAG formed by two GE links. Table 5-118 provides the planning information.
Parameter NE1
NOTE
In this example, the bandwidth of the Ethernet service to be transmitted is 40 Mbit/s, much smaller than the
bandwidth of a GE port. Therefore, you need not configure the link aggregation group to the load sharing mode
to increase the bandwidth.
ERPS Instance
Table 5-119 provides the information about ERPS.
RPLOwner No No Yes No
Ring Node Flag
Entity Level 4 (default value) 4 (default value) 4 (default value) 4 (default value)
WTR Time 600s (default 600s (default 600s (default 600s (default
value) value) value) value)
Guard Time 500 ms (default 500 ms (default 500 ms (default 500 ms (default
value) value) value) value)
NOTE
l In this example, all the services are aggregated on NE1. Hence, the NE that is farthest from NE1 needs to
function as the RPL owner. In this way, when the ring network is normal, the traffic carried on each link is
relatively even.
l The control VLAN needs to use a VLAN that is not used by any service. Considering that the inband DCN
uses VLAN 4094, it is recommended that the control VLAN use VLAN 4093.
l The packet transmit interval, entity level, WTR time, guard time, and hold-off time generally use the default
values.
Service ID 1 1 1 1
NOTE
In this example, ERPS is adopted to prevent network loop. Therefore, the split horizon group cannot be used.
QoS (Diffserv)
DS is the basis for QoS. It is recommended that the VLAN priority or DSCP value of the BTS
services be allocated by the service type. Then, the transmission network creates the
corresponding DS domain according to the allocated VLAN priority or DSCP value. Each
Ethernet port involved in the service must use the same DS configuration.
In this example, the BTS services are allocated with corresponding VLAN priorities according
to the service type, and the NEs allocate the PHB service classes according to the VLAN priority,
as provided in Table 5-121. Each Ethernet port involved in the service uses the same DS
configuration.
CS7 7 -
CS6 6 -
AF4 4 -
AF1 1 -
NOTE
During the mapping of the PHB service class, CS7 is not recommended, because CS7 may be used to transmit
Ethernet protocol packets or inband DCN packets on the NE.
Table 5-122 lists the queue scheduling mode used by each Ethernet port involved in the service
in this example.
CS7 SP
CS6 SP
EF SP
BE SP
In this example, no CAR or shaping processing needs to be performed on the services transmitted
from the BTS.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.6.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports and set the basic attributes of
Ethernet ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
7-EM4T-3 7-EM4T-4
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
7-EM4T-1 7-EM4T-2
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 and NE4 are provided as follows.
7-EM4T-1
Step 2 See A.12.7.1 Setting the General Attributes of the IF_ETH Port and set the basic attributes
of the IF_ETH ports.
The values for the related parameters of each NE are provided as follows.
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.2.1 Creating a LAG and create the LAG on NE1.
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in Port Settings are provided as follows.
Step 2 See A.12.1.1 Creating Ethernet Ring Protection Instances and create the ERPS instance.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
ERPS ID 1 1 1 1
RPLOwner No No Yes No
Ring Node Flag
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.3.4 Configuring the E-LAN Service and configure the E-LAN services.
l Parameters of NE1
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value Range
Service ID 1
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the UNI tab page are provided as
follows.
Port SVLAN VLANs/CVLAN
7-EM4T-3 - Blank
3-IFU2-1 - Blank
4-IFU2-1 - Blank
l Parameters of NE2
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Service ID 1
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the UNI tab page are provided as
follows.
Port SVLAN VLANs/CVLAN
7-EM4T-1 - Blank
7-EM4T-2 - Blank
3-IFU2-1 - Blank
4-IFU2-1 - Blank
Service ID 1
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the UNI tab page are provided as
follows.
Port SVLAN VLANs/CVLAN
7-EM4T-1 - Blank
3-IFU2-1 - Blank
4-IFU2-1 - Blank
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.10.1 Creating a DS Domain and create a DS domain.
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
Mapping Relation ID 2
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Ingress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.
0 BE
1 AF11
2 AF21
3 AF31
4 AF41
5 EF
6 CS6
7 CS7
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Egress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.
BE 0
AF11 1
AF21 2
AF31 3
AF41 4
EF 5
CS6 6
CS7 7
NOTE
The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid.
In this example, the AF11 is used. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Apply Port tab page are provided
as follows.
Step 2 See A.12.10.4 Creating a Port Policy and create the port policy.
The values for the related parameters of each NE are provided as follows.
Policy ID 1
Step 3 See A.12.10.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy and set the port that uses the port
policy.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Port 7-EM4T-3
3-IFU2-1
4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Port 7-EM4T-1
7-EM4T-2
3-IFU2-1
4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 and NE4 are provided as follows.
Port 7-EM4T-1
3-IFU2-1
4-IFU2-1
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.11.1 Creating an MD and create the MDs.
Maintenance 4 4 4 4
Domain Level
CC Test 1s 1s 1s 1s
Transmit
Period
Step 3 See A.12.11.3 Creating an MEP Point and create the MEP points.
VLAN - - - - -
Step 4 See A.12.11.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA and create the remote MEP points for NE1
to NE4.
The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Step 5 See perform an LB test to test the Ethernet service configurations and test the E-LAN
services.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 101 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 201 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 101 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 202 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 101 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 301 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 101 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 401 as the sink MEP.
There should be no packets lost during the LB tests.
----End
To meet the preceding requirements, IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services are configured
for service transmission on each NE; in addition, corresponding LAG protection and QoS
processing are configured.
FE
Domain 1
VLAN 110-119
FE NE4
BTS3
20 Mbit/s GE GE
VLAN 110-119
FE
NE3 NE2 NE1 BSC
120 Mbit/s
Domain 2 VLAN 110-129
BTS1
VLAN 120-129 45 Mbti/s
VLAN 110-119
FE
FE
NE6 NE5
BTS4
BTS5 25 Mbit/s
15 Mbit/s VLAN 120-129
VLAN 120-129
The connections of Ethernet links shown in Figure 5-33 are described as follows.
Between NE1 and 7-EM4F-3 Main port of a LAG Configure these ports
the BSC into a load non-
7-EM4F-4 Slave port of a LAG sharing LAG,
therefore improving
link reliability.
Broadcast packet - -
suppression threshold
Broadcast packet - -
suppression threshold
Parameter 7-EM4T-3
Parameter 7-EM4T-3
Broadcast packet - -
suppression threshold
Parameter 7-EM4T-1
NOTE
l In this example, the FE/GE port on the BTS/BSC works in auto-negotiation mode. Therefore, the FE/GE
port on each NE that transmits/receives services must work in auto-negotiation mode. For example, if the
peer Ethernet port changes to another working mode, the local Ethernet port also needs to change to the
same working mode accordingly. Plan the Ethernet ports within a network to work in auto-negotiation mode.
l In this example, to ensure that the Ethernet frames that carry more than one tag such as QinQ can traverse
the equipment, the maximum frame length is set to 1536 (bytes). If the equipment needs to transmit jumbo
frames with a greater length, set the maximum frame length according to the actual length of a jumbo frame.
l In this example, all the services carry VLAN tags. Therefore, the TAG attributes of all the ports are Tag
Aware.
l Generally, the flow control function is enabled only when the NE or the peer equipment is inadequate for
QoS processing. The flow control planning on the NE must match the flow control planning on the peer
equipment.
l In this example, no loopback check, loopback port shutdown, or broadcast packet suppression function is
enabled.
NOTE
The majority of the backhaul services on the BTS are Internet services. Therefore, the errored frame discarding
function needs to be enabled.
NOTE
In this example, the bandwidth of the Ethernet service to be transmitted is 120 Mbit/s, much smaller than the
bandwidth of a GE port. Therefore, you need not configure the link aggregation group to the load sharing mode
to increase the bandwidth.
Service ID 1 1 1 1 1 1
NOTE
QoS (Diffserv)
DS is the basis for QoS. It is recommended that the VLAN priority or DSCP value of the BTS
services be allocated by the service type. Then, the transmission network creates the
corresponding DS domain according to the allocated VLAN priority or DSCP value. Each
Ethernet port involved in the service must use the same DS configuration.
In this example, the BTS services are allocated with corresponding VLAN priorities according
to the service type, and the NEs allocate the PHB service classes according to the VLAN priority,
as provided in Table 5-143. Each Ethernet port involved in the service uses the same DS
configuration.
CS7 7 -
CS6 6 -
AF4 4 -
AF1 1 -
NOTE
During the mapping of the PHB service class, CS7 is not recommended, because CS7 may be used to transmit
Ethernet protocol packets or inband DCN packets on the NE.
Table 5-144 lists the queue scheduling mode used by each Ethernet port involved in the service
in this example.
CS7 SP
CS6 SP
EF SP
BE SP
NOTE
The CBS/PBS is in direct proportion to the CIR/PIR. That is, the larger the value of the CBS/PBS, the more the
burst packets are permitted. In this example, the values of the CBS and the PBS are set according to the bytes
that are transmitted at CIR and PIR during a 100 ms period.
service traffic that travels to the aggregation node, thus preventing congestion at the aggregation
node.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.6.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports and set the general attributes
of Ethernet ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4F-3 7-EM4F-4
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1 7-EM4T-3
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1 7-EM4T-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1 7-EM4T-2
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1
Step 2 See A.12.6.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports and set the Layer 2 attributes
of Ethernet ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4F-3 7-EM4F-4
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
7-EM4T-1 7-EM4T-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1 7-EM4T-2
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1
Step 3 See A.12.7.1 Setting the General Attributes of the IF_ETH Port and set the general attributes
of IF_ETH ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1
Step 4 See A.12.7.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of the IF_ETH Port and set the Layer 2 attributes
of IF_ETH ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.2.1 Creating a LAG and create the LAG for NE1.
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the Port Settings tab page are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.3.4 Configuring the E-LAN Service and configure the E-LAN services.
l Parameters of NE1
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the UNI tab page are provided
as follows.
7-EM4F-3 - 110-129
3-IFU2-1 - 110-129
l Parameters of NE2
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the UNI tab page are provided
as follows.
7-EM4T-3 - 110-129
7-EM4T-1 - 110-119
3-IFU2-1 - 110-129
l Parameters of NE3
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the UNI tab page are provided
as follows.
7-EM4T-3 - 110-129
3-IFU2-1 - 110-119
4-IFU2-1 - 120-129
l Parameters of NE4
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the UNI tab page are provided
as follows.
7-EM4T-1 - 110-119
7-EM4T-2 - 110-119
3-IFU2-1 - 110-119
l Parameters of NE5
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the UNI tab page are provided
as follows.
Port SVLAN VLANs/CVLAN
7-EM4T-1 - 120-129
3-IFU2-1 - 120-129
4-IFU2-1 - 120-129
l Parameters of NE6
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the UNI tab page are provided
as follows.
Port SVLAN VLANs/CVLAN
7-EM4T-1 - 120-129
3-IFU2-1 - 120-129
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.10.1 Creating a DS Domain and create a DS domain.
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
Parameter Value
Mapping Relation ID 2
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Ingress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.
0 BE
1 AF11
2 AF21
3 AF31
4 AF41
5 EF
6 CS6
7 CS7
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Egress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.
BE 0
AF11 1
AF21 2
AF31 3
AF41 4
EF 5
CS6 6
CS7 7
NOTE
The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid.
In this example, the AF11 is used. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Application Port tab page are
provided as follows.
Paramete Value
r
NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE5 NE6
NOTE
The mapping relation defined in the default DS domain is the same as the mapping relation defined in the DS
domain that is created in this step. Therefore, you can skip this step.
Step 2 See A.12.10.4 Creating a Port Policy and create the port policy.
l The values for the related parameters of NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Policy ID 1 2
Grooming Police After SP (CS7, CS6, and EF) SP (CS7, CS6, and EF)
Reloading WRR (AF4 to AF1) WRR (AF4 to AF1)
SP (BE) SP (BE)
Bandwidth Limit Disabled (for all PHB Disabled (for all PHB
service classes) service classes)
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 and NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Policy ID 1
Step 3 See A.12.10.6 Creating the Traffic and create the traffic on NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6.
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
Parameter Value
Traffic Classification ID 1
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the INGRESS tab page are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Match Value 2
Wildcard 0
CoS -
CIR(kbit/s) 4096
PIR(kbit/s) 8192
CBS(byte) 51200
Parameter Value
PBS(byte) 102400
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the EGRESS tab page are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Step 4 See A.12.10.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy and set the ports that use the port
policy.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Port 3-IFU2-1
7-EM4F-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Port 3-IFU2-1
4-IFU2-1
7-EM4T-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.11.1 Creating an MD and create the MDs for NE1, NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6.
Parameter Value
Maintenanc 4 4 4 4 4
e Domain
Level
Step 2 See A.12.11.2 Creating an MA and create the maintenance associations (MAs) for NE1, NE2,
NE4, NE5, and NE6.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
CC Test 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Transmit
Period
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Parameter Value
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Step 3 See A.12.11.3 Creating an MEP Point and create the MEP for NE1, NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Parameter Value
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Board 7-EM4T
Port 7-EM4T-1
VLAN 110
MP ID 201
Direction Ingress
CC Status Active
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
MP ID 401 402
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Board 7-EM4T
Parameter Value
Port 7-EM4T-1
VLAN 120
MP ID 501
Direction Ingress
CC Status Active
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Board 7-EM4T
Port 7-EM4T-1
VLAN 120
MP ID 601
Direction Ingress
CC Status Active
Step 4 See A.12.11.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA and create the remote MEP points for NE1,
NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6.
The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the relevant parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the relevant parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Step 5 See perform an LB test to test the Ethernet service configurations and test the E-LAN
services on NE1.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 101 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 201 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 102 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 401 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 103 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 402 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 104 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 501 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 105 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 601 as the sink MEP.
There should be no packets lost during the LB tests.
----End
Based on 3.6 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid Radio Ring Network),
configure Ethernet services according to the following requirements:
To meet the preceding requirements, IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN services are configured
to implement transmission of the BTS services; in addition, ERPS is configured to protect
services on the ring network. See Figure 5-34.
BTS4
FE 10 Mbit/s
S-VLAN 130
FE
FE
ERPS
NE2 NE4
802.1ad bridge
802.1ad bridge
FE
NE3
802.1ad bridge BTS3
10 Mbit/s
S-VLAN 120
The connections of Ethernet links shown in Figure 5-34 are described as follows.
Between NE1 and 7-EM4T-3 Main port of a LAG Configure these ports
the BSC into a load non-
7-EM4T-4 Slave port of a LAG sharing LAG,
therefore improving
link reliability.
Between NE1 and 4-IFU2-1 East port of an ERPS Configure this port to
NE2 ring node transmit Ethernet
services on Hybrid
radio.
Between NE2 and 4-IFU2-1 East port of an ERPS Configure this port to
NE3 ring node transmit Ethernet
services on Hybrid
radio.
Between NE4 and 4-IFU2-1 East port of an ERPS Configure this port to
NE1 ring node transmit Ethernet
services on Hybrid
radio.
Ethernet Port
Table 5-150 to Table 5-153 provide the information about each Ethernet port involved in the
service.
Broadcast Packet - -
Suppression Threshold
Broadcast Packet - -
Suppression Threshold
Parameter 7-EM4T-1
NOTE
l If the Ethernet services on each BTS do not contain any untagged frames, you can set Encapsulation
Type to 802.1Q and set Tag to Tag Aware for the FE port that accesses the Ethernet services on each BTS.
l In this example, the FE/GE port on the BTS/BSC works in the auto-negotiation mode. Hence, the FE/GE
port of each NE that accesses services must work in the auto-negotiation mode. If the peer Ethernet port
works in another mode, the local Ethernet port must work in the same mode. The working modes of the
Ethernet ports inside the network are planned as auto-negotiation.
l In this example, to ensure that the Ethernet frames that carry more than one tag such as QinQ can traverse
the equipment, the maximum frame length is set to 1536 (bytes). If the equipment needs to transmit jumbo
frames with a greater length, set the maximum frame length according to the actual length of a jumbo frame.
l Generally, the flow control function is enabled only when the NE or the peer equipment is inadequate for
QoS processing. The flow control planning on the NE must match the flowing control planning on the peer
equipment.
l In this example, the loopback check, loopback port shutdown, and broadcast packet suppression functions
need not be enabled.
l In this example, the SVLAN T-PID that the BSC can identify is 0x8100. Hence, you need to set QinQ Type
Domain to 0x8100 for the two GE ports connecting to the BSC.
NOTE
l The IF_ETH ports connect to internal equipment. Hence, you need to set QinQ Type Domain to 0x88a8
for the IF_ETH ports.
l The majority of the backhaul services on the BTS are Internet services. Hence, the error frame discarding
function needs to be enabled.
LAG
To improve the reliability of service transmission, NE1 and the BSC are interconnected through
the LAG formed by two GE links. Table 5-158 provides the planning information.
Parameter NE1
NOTE
In this example, the bandwidth of the Ethernet service to be transmitted is 40 Mbit/s, much smaller than the
bandwidth of a GE port. Therefore, you need not configure the link aggregation group to the load sharing mode
to increase the bandwidth.
ERPS Instance
Table 5-159 provides the information about ERPS.
RPLOwner No No Yes No
Ring Node Flag
Entity Level 4 (default value) 4 (default value) 4 (default value) 4 (default value)
WTR Time 600s (default 600s (default 600s (default 600s (default
value) value) value) value)
Guard Time 500 ms (default 500 ms (default 500 ms (default 500 ms (default
value) value) value) value)
NOTE
l In this example, all the services are aggregated on NE1. Hence, the NE that is farthest from NE1 needs to
function as the RPL owner. In this way, when the ring network is normal, the traffic carried on each link is
relatively even.
l The control VLAN needs to use a VLAN that is not used by any service. Considering that the inband DCN
uses VLAN 4094, it is recommended that the control VLAN use VLAN 4093.
l The packet transmit interval, entity level, WTR time, guard time, and hold-off time generally use the default
values.
Service ID 1 1 1 1
Mounted NNI 3-IFU2-1 (S- 3-IFU2-1 (S- 3-IFU2-1 (S- 3-IFU2-1 (S-
Port VLAN ID: VLAN ID: VLAN ID: VLAN ID:
100,110,120,13 100,110,120,13 100,110,120,13 100,110,120,13
0) 0) 0) 0)
4-IFU2-1 (S- 4-IFU2-1 (S- 4-IFU2-1 (S- 4-IFU2-1 (S-
VLAN ID: VLAN ID: VLAN ID: VLAN ID:
100,110,120,13 100,110,120,13 100,110,120,13 100,110,120,13
0) 0) 0) 0)
7-EM4T-3 (S-
VLAN ID:
100,110,120,13
0)
QoS (Diffserv)
DS is the basis for QoS. It is recommended that the VLAN priority or DSCP value of the BTS
services be allocated by the service type. Then, the transmission network creates the
corresponding DS domain according to the allocated VLAN priority or DSCP value. Each
Ethernet port involved in the service must use the same DS configuration.
In this example, the BTS services are allocated with corresponding VLAN priorities according
to the service type, and the NEs allocate the PHB service classes according to the VLAN priority,
as provided in Table 5-161. Each Ethernet port involved in the service uses the same DS
configuration.
CS7 7 -
CS6 6 -
AF4 4 -
AF1 1 -
NOTE
During the mapping of the PHB service class, CS7 is not recommended, because CS7 may be used to transmit
Ethernet protocol packets or inband DCN packets on the NE.
CS7 SP
CS6 SP
EF SP
BE SP
QoS (Diffserv)
DS is the basis for QoS. It is recommended that the VLAN priority or DSCP value of the BTS
services be allocated by the service type. Then, the transmission network creates the
corresponding DS domain according to the allocated VLAN priority or DSCP value. Each
Ethernet port involved in the service must use the same DS configuration.
In this example, the BTS services are allocated with corresponding VLAN priorities according
to the service type, and the NEs allocate the PHB service classes according to the VLAN priority,
as provided in Table 5-163. Each Ethernet port involved in the service uses the same DS
configuration.
CS7 7 -
CS6 6 -
AF4 4 -
AF1 1 -
NOTE
During the mapping of the PHB service class, CS7 is not recommended, because CS7 may be used to transmit
Ethernet protocol packets or inband DCN packets on the NE.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.6.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports and set the basic attributes of
Ethernet ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-3 7-EM4T-4
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1 7-EM4T-2
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 and NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1
Step 2 See A.12.6.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports and set the Layer 2 attributes
of Ethernet ports for NE1.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-3 7-EM4T-4
Step 3 See A.12.7.1 Setting the General Attributes of the IF_ETH Port and set the attributes of the
IF_ETH ports.
The values for the related parameters of each NE are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.2.1 Creating a LAG and create the LAG on NE1.
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in Port Settings are provided as follows.
Step 2 See A.12.1.1 Creating Ethernet Ring Protection Instances and create the ERPS instance.
ERPS ID 1 1 1 1
RPLOwner No No Yes No
Ring Node Flag
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.3.4 Configuring the E-LAN Service and configure the E-LAN services.
l Parameters of NE1
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the NNI tab page are provided
as follows.
Port SVLANs
3-IFU2-1 100,110,120,130
4-IFU2-1 100,110,120,130
7-EM4T-3 100,110,120,130
l Parameters of NE2
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the UNI tab page are provided
as follows.
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the NNI tab page are provided
as follows.
Port SVLANs
3-IFU2-1 100,110,120,130
Port SVLANs
4-IFU2-1 100,110,120,130
l Parameters of NE3
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the UNI tab page are provided
as follows.
Port SVLAN VLANs/CVLAN
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the NNI tab page are provided
as follows.
Port SVLANs
3-IFU2-1 100,110,120,130
4-IFU2-1 100,110,120,130
l Parameters of NE4
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the UNI tab page are provided
as follows.
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the NNI tab page are provided
as follows.
Port SVLANs
3-IFU2-1 100,110,120,130
4-IFU2-1 100,110,120,130
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.10.1 Creating a DS Domain and create a DS domain.
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
Parameter Value
Mapping Relation ID 2
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Ingress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.
0 0 BE
1 1 AF11
2 2 AF21
3 3 AF31
4 4 AF41
5 5 EF
6 6 CS6
7 7 CS7
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Egress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.
BE 0 0
AF11 1 1
AF21 2 2
AF31 3 3
AF41 4 4
EF 5 5
CS6 6 6
CS7 7 7
NOTE
The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid.
In this example, the AF11 is used. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Application Port tab page are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Step 2 See A.12.10.3 Changing the Ports That Use the DS Domain and change the ports that use the
DS domain.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
3-IFU2-1 SVLAN
4-IFU2-1 SVLAN
7-EM4T-3 SVLAN
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Selected Port Packet Type
7-EM4T-1 CVLAN
7-EM4T-2 CVLAN
3-IFU2-1 SVLAN
4-IFU2-1 SVLAN
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 and NE4 are provided as follows.
Selected Port Packet Type
7-EM4T-1 CVLAN
3-IFU2-1 SVLAN
4-IFU2-1 SVLAN
Step 3 See A.12.10.4 Creating a Port Policy and create the port policy.
l Parameters of NE1
The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Policy ID 1
The values for the related parameters of NE2, NE3, and NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Policy ID 1 2
Grooming Police After SP (CS7, CS6, and EF) SP (CS7, CS6, and EF)
Reloading WRR (AF4 to AF1) WRR (AF4 to AF1)
SP (BE) SP (BE)
Bandwidth Limit Disabled (for all PHB Disabled (for all PHB
service classes) service classes)
Step 4 See A.12.10.6 Creating the Traffic and create the traffic for NE2, NE3, and NE4.
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
Parameter Value
Traffic Classification ID 1
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the INGRESS tab page are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Match Value 2
Wildcard 0
CoS -
CIR(kbit/s) 4096
PIR(kbit/s) 8192
Parameter Value
CBS(byte) 51200
PBS(byte) 102400
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the EGRESS tab page are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Step 5 See A.12.10.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy and set the port that uses the port
policy.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Port 3-IFU2-1
4-IFU2-1
7-EM4F-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 and NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.11.1 Creating an MD and create the MDs.
Maintenance 4 4 4 4
Domain Level
Parameter Value
CC Test 1s 1s 1s 1s
Transmit
Period
Step 3 See A.12.11.3 Creating an MEP Point and create the MEP points.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows,
Parameter Value
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
VLAN - -
MP ID 201 202
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Board 7-EM4T
Port 7-EM4T-1
Parameter Value
VLAN -
MP ID 301
Direction Ingress
CC Status Active
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Board 7-EM4T
Port 7-EM4T-1
VLAN -
MP ID 401
Direction Ingress
CC Status Active
Step 4 See A.12.11.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA and create the remote MEP points for NE1
to NE4.
The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Step 5 See perform an LB test to test the Ethernet service configurations and test the E-LAN
services.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 101 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 201 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 102 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 202 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 103 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 301 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 104 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 401 as the sink MEP.
There should be no packets lost during the LB tests.
----End
FE
GE GE
BTS3 FE
NE4
20 Mbit/s FE
NE3 NE2 NE1 BSC
120 Mbit/s
FE BTS1
FE 45 Mbit/s
NE6 NE5
BTS4
BTS5 25 Mbit/s
15 Mbit/s
Point-to-point transparently
transmitted E-Line service
The connections of Ethernet links shown in Figure 5-35 are described as follows.
Between NE1 and 7-EM4F-3 Main port of a LAG Configure these ports
the BSC into a load non-
7-EM4F-4 Slave port of a LAG sharing LAG,
therefore improving
link reliability.
Broadcast packet - -
suppression threshold
Broadcast packet - -
suppression threshold
Parameter 7-EM4T-1
Parameter 7-EM4T-1
NOTE
l In this example, the planned encapsulation type is null because whether the Ethernet services on each BTS
carry a VLAN ID or whether the carried VLAN IDs conflict is unknown.
l In this example, the FE/GE port on the BTS/BSC works in auto-negotiation mode. Therefore, the FE/GE
port on each NE that transmits/receives services must work in auto-negotiation mode. For example, if the
peer Ethernet port changes to another working mode, the local Ethernet port also needs to change to the
same working mode accordingly. Plan the Ethernet ports within a network to work in auto-negotiation mode.
l In this example, to ensure that the Ethernet frames that carry more than one tag such as QinQ can traverse
the equipment, the maximum frame length is set to 1536 (bytes). If the equipment needs to transmit jumbo
frames with a greater length, set the maximum frame length according to the actual length of a jumbo frame.
l Generally, the flow control function is enabled only when the NE or the peer equipment is inadequate for
QoS processing. The flow control planning on the NE must match the flow control planning on the peer
equipment.
l In this example, no loopback check, loopback port shutdown, or broadcast packet suppression function is
enabled.
NOTE
The majority of the backhaul services on the BTS are Internet services. Therefore, the errored frame discarding
function needs to be enabled.
NOTE
In this example, the bandwidth of the Ethernet service to be transmitted is 120 Mbit/s, much smaller than the
bandwidth of a GE port. Therefore, you need not configure the link aggregation group to the load sharing mode
to increase the bandwidth.
Table 5-183 Information about point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services (NE1)
Parameter NE1
Service ID 1
Table 5-184 Information about point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services (NE6)
Parameter NE6
Service ID 1
Parameter NE6
Service ID 1
Table 5-186 Information about IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN services (NE3)
Parameter NE3
Service ID 1
Parameter NE3
Table 5-187 Information about IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN services (NE4)
Parameter NE4
Service ID 1
Table 5-188 Information about IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN services (NE5)
Parameter NE5
Service ID 1
QoS (Diffserv)
DS is the basis for QoS. It is recommended that the VLAN priority or DSCP value of the BTS
services be allocated according to the service type. Then, the transmission network creates the
corresponding DS domain according to the allocated VLAN priority or DSCP value. Each
Ethernet port involved in the service must use the same DS configuration.
In this example, the BTS services are allocated with corresponding DSCP values according to
the service type, and the NEs allocate the PHB service classes according to the DSCP value, as
shown in Table 5-189. Each Ethernet port involved in the service uses the same DS
configuration.
CS7 56 -
CS6 48 -
AF4 32 -
AF1 8 -
NOTE
During the mapping of the PHB service class, CS7 is not recommended, because CS7 may be used to transmit
Ethernet protocol packets or inband DCN packets on the NE.
Table 5-190 lists the queue scheduling mode used by each Ethernet port involved in the service
in this example.
CS7 SP
CS6 SP
EF SP
BE SP
In this example, traffic shaping also needs to be performed on the DS edge node in the uplink
direction (from the BTS to the BSC) of the OM and HSDPA real-time services on each BTS
(that is, the service with the DSCP value being 24). Table 5-192 lists the shaping parameters.
Parameter Value
NOTE
The CBS/PBS is proportional to the CIR/PIR. That is, the larger the value of the CBS/PBS, the more the burst
packets are permitted. In this example, the values of the CBS and the PBS are set according to the bytes that are
transmitted at CIR and PIR during a 100 ms period.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.6.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports and set the general attributes
of Ethernet ports.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4F-3 7-EM4F-4
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1 7-EM4T-3
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-3
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1 7-EM4T-2
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
7-EM4T-1
Step 2 See A.12.7.1 Setting the General Attributes of the IF_ETH Port and set the general attributes
of IF_ETH ports.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1 4-IFU2-1
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
3-IFU2-1
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.2.1 Creating a LAG and create the LAG for NE1.
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the Port Settings tab page are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.3.2 Configuring the E-Line Service and configure the E-Line services on NE1 and
NE6.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-UNI
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1
Direction UNI-UNI
Parameter Value
Step 2 See A.12.3.4 Configuring the E-LAN Service and configure the E-LAN services on NE2 to
NE5.
The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 that need to be set in the main interface are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the UNI tab page are provided as
follows.
7-EM4T-3 - Blank
3-IFU2-1 - Blank
4-IFU2-1 - Blank
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the Split Horizon Group tab page
are provided as follows.
1 7-EM4T-3, 7-EM4T-1
The values for the relevant parameters of NE3 that need to be set in the main interface are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the UNI tab page are provided as
follows.
7-EM4T-3 - Blank
3-IFU2-1 - Blank
4-IFU2-1 - Blank
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the Split Horizon Group tab page
are provided as follows.
1 3-IFU2-1, 4-IFU2-1
The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 that need to be set in the main interface are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the UNI tab page are provided as
follows.
7-EM4T-1 - Blank
7-EM4T-2 - Blank
3-IFU2-1 - Blank
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the Split Horizon Group tab page
are provided as follows.
1 7-EM4T-1, 7-EM4T-2
The values for the relevant parameters of NE5 that need to be set in the main interface are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Service ID 1
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the UNI tab page are provided as
follows.
7-EM4T-1 - Blank
3-IFU2-1 - Blank
4-IFU2-1 - Blank
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the Split Horizon Group tab page
are provided as follows.
1 3-IFU2-1, 7-EM4T-1
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.10.1 Creating a DS Domain and create a DS domain.
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
Parameter Value
Mapping Relation ID 2
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the Ingress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.
0 BE
8 AF11
16 AF21
24 AF31
32 AF41
40 EF
48 CS6
56 CS7
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the Egress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.
BE 0
AF11 8
AF21 16
AF31 24
AF41 32
EF 40
CS6 48
CS7 56
NOTE
The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid.
In this example, the AF11 is used. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the Apply Port tab page are provided
as follows.
Paramete Value
r
NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE5 NE6
Step 2 See A.12.10.4 Creating a Port Policy and create the port policy.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 and NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Policy ID 1
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 and NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Policy ID 1 2 3
Parameter Value
Grooming Police SP (CS7, CS6, and SP (CS7, CS6, and SP (CS7, CS6, and
After Reloading EF) EF) EF)
WRR (AF4 to AF1) WRR (AF4 to AF1) WRR (AF4 to AF1)
SP (BE) SP (BE) SP (BE)
Bandwidth Limit Disabled (for all Disabled (for all Disabled (for all
PHB service PHB service PHB service
classes) classes) classes)
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 and NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Policy ID 1 2
Grooming Police After SP (CS7, CS6, and EF) SP (CS7, CS6, and EF)
Reloading WRR (AF4 to AF1) WRR (AF4 to AF1)
SP (BE) SP (BE)
Bandwidth Limit Disabled (for all PHB Disabled (for all PHB
service classes) service classes)
Step 3 See A.12.10.6 Creating the Traffic and create the traffic on NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6.
l Parameters of NE2
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Traffic Classification ID 1 1
Parameter Value
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the INGRESS tab page are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Match Value 16 24
Wildcard 0 0
CoS - -
CIR(kbit/s) 4096 -
PIR(kbit/s) 8192 -
CBS(byte) 51200 -
PBS(byte) 102400 -
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the EGRESS tab page are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
CIR(kbit/s) - 2048
Parameter Value
PIR(kbit/s) - 4096
CBS(byte) - 25600
PBS(byte) - 51200
l Parameters of NE4
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Traffic 1 1 2
Classification ID
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the INGRESS tab page are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Match Value 16 24 24
Wildcard 0 0 0
CoS - - -
CIR(kbit/s) 4096 - -
PIR(kbit/s) 8192 - -
CBS(byte) 51200 - -
PBS(byte) 102400 - -
Parameter Value
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the EGRESS tab page are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l Parameters of NE5
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Traffic Classification ID 1 1
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the INGRESS tab page are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Match Value 16 24
Wildcard 0 0
CoS - -
CIR(kbit/s) 4096 -
PIR(kbit/s) 8192 -
CBS(byte) 51200 -
PBS(byte) 102400 -
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the EGRESS tab page are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
CIR(kbit/s) - 2048
PIR(kbit/s) - 4096
CBS(byte) - 25600
PBS(byte) - 51200
l Parameters of NE6
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided
as follows.
Parameter Value
Traffic Classification ID 1 1
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the INGRESS tab page are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Match Value 16 24
Wildcard 0 0
CoS - -
CIR(kbit/s) 4096 -
PIR(kbit/s) 8192 -
CBS(byte) 51200 -
PBS(byte) 102400 -
The values for the relevant parameters that need to be set in the EGRESS tab page are
provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Parameter Value
CIR(kbit/s) - 2048
PIR(kbit/s) - 4096
CBS(byte) - 25600
PBS(byte) - 51200
Step 4 See A.12.10.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy and set the ports that use the port
policy.
l The values for the related parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Port 3-IFU2-1
7-EM4F-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the related parameters of NE3 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Port 3-IFU2-1
4-IFU2-1
7-EM4T-3
l The values for the related parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the related parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the related parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
----End
Procedure
Step 1 See A.12.11.1 Creating an MD and configure the MD for NE1, NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6.
Parameter Value
Maintenanc 4 4 4 4 4
e Domain
Level
Step 2 See A.12.11.2 Creating an MA and configure the MDs for NE1, NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Parameter Value
Relevant 1- 1- 1- 1- 1-
Service NE2toBSC NE2toBSC NE2toBSC NE2toBSC NE2toBSC
CC Test 1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
Transmit
Period
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Step 3 See A.12.11.3 Creating an MEP Point and create the MAs for NE1, NE2, NE4, NE5, and NE6.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
VLAN - - - - -
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Board 7-EM4T
Port 7-EM4T-1
VLAN -
MP ID 201
Direction Ingress
CC Status Active
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
VLAN - -
MP ID 401 402
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Board 7-EM4T
Port 7-EM4T-1
VLAN -
MP ID 501
Direction Ingress
CC Status Active
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Board 7-EM4T
Port 7-EM4T-1
VLAN -
MP ID 601
Direction Ingress
Parameter Value
CC Status Active
Step 4 See A.12.11.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA and create the MEP for NE1, NE2, NE4,
NE5, and NE6.
The values for the relevant parameters of NE1 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the relevant parameters of NE2 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the relevant parameters of NE4 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the relevant parameters of NE5 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
The values for the relevant parameters of NE6 are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Step 5 See perform an LB test to test the Ethernet service configurations and test the Ethernet
services on NE1.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 101 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 201 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 102 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 401 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 103 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 402 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 104 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 501 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MP ID is 105 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MP ID is 601 as the sink MEP.
There should be no packets lost during the LB tests.
----End
To ensure that clocks of all the nodes on the transmission network are synchronized, configure
the clocks for these nodes according to a unified clock synchronization policy.
As shown in Figure 6-1, the radio links between NE1 and NE2 adopt the 1+1 protection. NE2
needs to trace the clock on the radio links to keep synchronous with NE1. In this case, the clock
sources extracted by the main and standby IF boards can be configured in the clock source
priority list. The clock source extracted by the main IF board, however, has a higher priority.
Thus, if the 1+1 IF protection switching occurs on the radio links, the clock can be switched at
the same time.
1+1 protection
configuration
SSM Protection
The SSM protection uses the SSM protocol specified in ITU-T G.781 to realize the clock
protection. According to the SSM protocol, the SDH NE transmits the SSM protocol through
bits 5-8 of the S1 byte, realizes the automatic protection switching of clock sources, and prevents
the timing loop. The OptiX RTN 910 supports the SSM protection on the SDH optical
transmission lines and STM-1 radio links. After the SSM protection is enabled on an NE, the
automatic protection switching of clock sources conforms to the following rules:
l According to the clock source priority list, the NE selects the clock source of the best quality
as the synchronization source.
l If multiple clock sources have the best quality, the NE selects the one of the highest priority
as the synchronization source.
l By using the S1 byte, the NE broadcasts the information of the synchronization source
quality to the downstream NEs, and also notifies the upstream NE that the clock source
from the NE cannot be used for synchronization.
Figure 6-2 is an STM-1 radio ring where the SSM protection is enabled.
When the network operates normally, the NEs on the ring select the clock source as follows:
1. NE1 selects the external clock source as the synchronization source and notifies NE2 and
NE4 of the external clock quality.
2. NE2 and NE4 select the clock source from NE1 as the synchronization source and notify
NE1 that the clock sources from NE2 and NE4 are unusable.
3. NE3 detects that the clock sources from NE2 and NE4 have the same quality and selects
the clock source of a higher priority (the clock source from NE2) as the synchronization
source. In addition, NE3 transmits the information of the synchronization source quality to
NE4 and notifies NE2 that the clock source from NE3 is unusable.
4. NE4 detects that the clock sources from NE1 and NE3 have the same quality and selects
the clock source of a higher priority (the clock source from NE3) as the synchronization
source. In addition, NE4 transmits the information of the synchronization source quality to
NE1 and notifies NE3 that the clock source from NE4 is unusable.
5. According to the clock quality in west and east directions and the configured clock source
priorities, NE2, NE3, and NE4 determine that the synchronization source requires no
modifications. Thus, the clock source selection is finished.
When the radio links between NE1 and NE2 become faulty, the NEs on the ring select the clock
source as follows:
1. NE2 selects the internal source as the synchronization source and transmits the information
of the synchronization source quality to NE1 and NE3.
2. NE3 selects NE2 as the clock source and informs NE4 of the clock quality.
3. After detecting that the quality of the clock from NE1 is higher than the quality of the clock
from NE3, NE4 transmits the clock quality information to NE3 and informs NE1 that the
clock from NE4 is unavailable.
4. After detecting that the quality of the clock from NE4 is higher than the quality of the clock
from NE2, NE3 selects the clock source from NE4 as the synchronization source, transmits
the information of the synchronization source quality to NE2, and notifies NE4 that the
clock source from NE3 is unusable.
5. After detecting that the quality of the clock from NE3 is higher than the quality of the
internal clock source, NE2 selects the clock source from NE3 as the synchronization source,
transmits the information of the synchronization source quality to NE1, and notifies NE3
that the clock source from NE2 is unusable.
6. According to the clock quality in west and east directions and the configured clock source
priorities, NE2, NE3, and NE4 determine that the synchronization source requires no
modifications. Thus, the clock source selection is finished.
NOTE
The SSM protection does not provide a complete solution to the timing loop. Thus, when you configure clock
sources, the clocks cannot form a loop as on NE1 in this example.
E W
W E
West/East/
West/East/
Internal
Internal
NE2 W NE4
E
W E
E W
W E
West/East/ West/East/
Internal
Internal
NE2 E W NE4
W E
West/
East/
NE3 Extenal/
Master clock Internal
Slave BITS
NOTE
l The extended SSM protection provides a complete solution to the timing loop. Thus, when you configure
clock sources, the clocks can form a loop.
l The extended SSM protection is advantageous in the complex networking of clock protection, for example,
the dual external clocks. Hence, the extended SSM protection is used in only a few cases.
l The master (source) node accesses one clock source (which can be an external clock, a line
clock, or an Ethernet clock). On this node, the accessed clock source should be configured.
l In the case of the other nodes, the clock sources for their upper level radio links should be
configured.
l If the upper level radio link is configured with 1+1 protection, a node should be configured
with two radio clock sources, and the clock source for the main radio link should have a
higher priority than the clock source for the standby radio link.
l If a node has multiple upper level radio links (for example, the upper level radio links are
configured with XPIC or N+1 protection), each radio link should be configured with one
radio clock source on this node. In addition, these radio clock sources should be configured
with different priorities according to the actual condition.
l The SSM or extended SSM protection need not be configured.
Figure 6-4 shows the clock synchronization policy for a chain network.
l The master node (NE1) accesses one external clock source. In this case, the clock source
priorities for NE1 in a descending order are as follows: external clock source > internal
clock source.
l The radio link between NE1 and NE2 comprises the IF1 board in slot 3 on NE2, and thus
the clock source priorities for NE2 in a descending order are as follows: 3-IF1-1 > internal
clock source.
l The radio link between NE3 and NE2 comprises the IF1 board in slot 3 on NE3, and thus
the clock source priorities for NE3 in a descending order are as follows: 3-IF-1 > internal
clock source.
l The SSM or extended SSM protection need not be configured.
clock
Figure 6-5 Clock synchronization policy for a ring network (on which only the SDH signal is
transmitted)
BITS
NE2 NE1
NE6
West/East/ West/East/
Internal E Internal
W Extenal/ W E
E Internal W
W E
West/East/ E W
W E West/East/
Internal
Internal
NE3 NE5
NE4
West/East/
Master clock Internal
Figure 6-6 shows the clock synchronization policy for a ring on which not only the SDH signal
is transmitted.
l The ring uses the Hybrid radio for transmission. Thus, divide the ring into the following
chains at the master node (NE1): NE1-NE2-NE3 and NE1-NE4.
l In the case of the master node (NE1), the port 1 on the EM6T board in slot 2 accesses the
Ethernet link, which functions as a clock source. Hence, the clock source priorities for NE1
in a descending order are as follows: 2-EMT6-1 > internal clock source.
l NE2 traces the clock of the master node, and thus the clock source priorities for NE2 in a
descending order are as follows: west clock source > internal clock source.
l NE3 traces the clock of NE2, and thus the clock source priorities for NE3 in a descending
order are as follows: west clock source > internal clock source.
l NE4 traces the clock of the master node (NE1), and thus the clock source priorities for NE4
in a descending order are as follows: east clock source > internal clock source.
l The SSM or extended SSM protection need not be configured.
Figure 6-6 Clock synchronization policy for a ring network (on which not only the SDH signal
is transmitted)
BSC NE1
2-EM6T-1/
Internal
E W
W E
West/ East/
Internal Internal
NE2 W NE4
E
W E
West/
Internal
NE3
Clock
l The upper level NE accesses a clock source (which can be an external clock source, a line
clock source, or an Ethernet clock source).
l If the service of a lower-level NE is aggregated to the upper level NE through the optical
transmission line or Ethernet, the lower-level NE should trace the upper level line clock or
Ethernet clock.
l If the service of a lower-level NE is aggregated to the upper level NE only through the E1
signal, the lower-level NE should trace the tributary clock source (E1 ports 1 and 5 on the
E1 tributary board/system control, cross-connect, and timing board support the tributary
clock source).
l If the service of a lower-level NE is aggregated to the upper level NE only through the E1
signal and the lower-level NE is connected to many hops of downstream radio links, tracing
the tributary clock source causes anomalies such as pointer justifications. In this case, the
lower-level NE should trace the external clock source output by the upper level NE.
l The SSM or extended SSM protection need not be configured.
Figure 6-7 shows the clock synchronization policy for a tributary port aggregation network.
l The master node (NE1) accesses one external clock source. In this case, the clock source
priorities for NE1 in a descending order are as follows: external clock source > internal
clock source.
l The IF1 boards in slots 3 and 4 on NE2 form a 1+1 IF protection, where the IF1 board in
slot 3 functions as the main board. In addition, the radio links between NE1 and NE2
comprise the two IF1 boards. Hence, the clock source priorities for NE2 in a descending
order are as follows: 3-IF1-1 > 4-IF1-1 > internal clock source.
l The service of NE3 is aggregate to NE2 through ports 1 to 4 on the SP3S board in slot 9.
Hence, the clock source priorities for NE3 in a descending order are as follows: 9-SP3S-1
> internal clock source.
l NE4 is connected to many hops of downstream radio links. In this case, if it traces the
tributary clock source, pointer justifications occur on the downstream nodes. Hence, NE4
traces the external clock source output by NE2.
l The SSM protection or extended SSM protection need not be configured.
Figure 6-7 Clock synchronization policy for a port aggregation network (aggregation only
through the tributary port)
NE3
NE1 NE2
9-SP3S-1/
Internal
External/ 3-IF1-1/ NE4
Internal 4-IF1-1/
Internal
External/
Clock Internal
l The number of NEs on a long clock chain should not be more than 20. A number smaller
than 10 is recommended. If a large number of NEs exist on a long clock chain, add one
more clock source for signal compensation in the middle of the chain.
l It is recommended that the SDH optical port should be used at a convergence node to
converge the TDM service. In this manner, the clock signal can be transmitted over the
SDH signal rather than over the PDH signal, which ensures the quality of the clock signal.
If the BTS can access the transmission network through an SDH optical port or Ethernet port,
use the SDH optical port or Ethernet port to provide the timing reference signal for the BTS.
If the BTS can access the transmission network only through the E1 signal, the external clock
port is preferred to transmit the timing reference signal to the BTS.
If the BTS can access the transmission network only through the E1 signal and the external clock
port cannot be used, use the E1 port to transmit the timing reference signal to the BTS. If the
output clock does not meet the requirement of the BTS, the NE that is connected to the BTS can
use the tributary retiming function.
If the BTS can be accessed to the transmission network through Ethernet only and does not
support the synchronous Ethernet function, you can provide the timing reference signal to the
BTS through the external clock port.
Tributary Retiming
When being transmitted by the OptiX RTN 910, the PDH signal must undergo mapping and
demapping processes, during which the jitter occurs. In addition, pointer justifications during
the network transmission process cause the jitter of the PDH signal.
Tributary retiming helps to reduce the jitter of the PDH signal when it is transmitted on a
transmission network. Tributary retiming realizes the transmission of the signal that combines
the timing reference signal and the PDH service signal. Hence, the transmitted PDH signal carries
the timing information that is synchronized with the timing reference signal.
Figure 6-8 shows how a BSC transmits the synchronization information to a BTS through the
radio transmission network after the tributary retiming function is enabled. The radio
transmission network extracts the tributary clock from the E1 signal that is transmitted from the
BSC. This tributary clock functions as the synchronization reference clock for the radio
transmission network to be synchronized with the clock of the BSC. The tributary retiming
function is enabled on NE3. In this manner, NE3 transmits the E1 signal that carries the retiming
clock information to the BTS (NE3 selects the system clock as the retiming clock). In addition,
NE3 is synchronized with the BSC. Hence, the BTS can extract the clock signal of the BSC from
the tributary signal.
The basic working principle of tributary retiming is as follows: The tributary signal is written
into a large-capacity first in first output (FIFO), and then the tributary signal is read from the
FIFO through the retiming clock. In this manner, the output signal contains the retiming clock
information, and FIFO eliminates the jitter and wander in the original tributary signal. The OptiX
RTN 910 can select the system clock or the line clock in the uplink E1 signal as the retiming
clock, depending on the specific networking. In general cases, the system clock is selected as
the retiming clock.
E1 E1
BSC
NE3
Write clk
Clock (downlink E1 clk)
E1 E1
FIFO
Read clk
(retiming clk)
When using the tributary retiming function, pay attention to the following points:
l The retiming clock should be synchronized with the clock of the BSC, and the retiming
clock should not undergo mapping and demapping processes.
l The tributary retiming function uses the FIFO, which causes a delay of 125 us or more. Use
this function when it is necessary.
l The retiming function requires that the entire transmission network should be synchronized
with the service network that requires retiming. If certain NEs on the transmission network
are not synchronized, slips occur.
l The transmission network can meet the retiming requirement of only one service network.
Optional
Configuring clock sources
Modifying parameters of
the output clock
End
A.11.3 Optional.
Self-
Defined
Clock
Quality
5 A.11.6 Modifying the Optional when the external clock port is used to
Parameters of the transmit the clock reference signal for the customer
Clock Output equipment.
Set the parameters according to the requirement of
the customer equipment. In general cases, these
parameters take the default values.
6 A.16 Setting the Optional when the output tributary clock requires
Parameters of PDH retiming.
Ports Set Retiming Mode to Retiming Mode of Cross-
Connect Clock for the tributary port.
7 A.11.9 Querying the l When a clock subnet uses the internal clock
Clock Synchronization source of an NE as the reference clock, set NE
Status Clock Working Mode to Free-Run Mode for
this NE; set NE Clock Working Mode to
Tracing Mode for the other NEs.
l When a clock subnet uses the clock out of the
subnet as the reference clock, set NE Clock
Working Mode to Tracing Mode for all the NEs.
Based on 3.3 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the TDM Radio Chain Network),
configure the clocks according to the following network planning information (as shown in
Figure 6-10):
l The radio transmission network is directly synchronized with the clock of the BSC.
l Clock synchronization signals are transmitted to the BTSs over E1 signals.
BTS2 E1
STM-1 STM-1
E1
NE4
BTS3
E1
NE3 NE2 NE1 BSC
E1 BTS1
E1
NE6 NE5
BTS5 BTS4
Between NE1 and the BSC 8-SL1D-1 (working port of a The ports are used to
linear MSP group) synchronizing NE1 with the
clock of the BSC.
8-SL1D-2 (protection port of
a linear MSP group)
Between NE2 and NE1 3-IF1 (main IF board of a 1+1 The ports are used to
HSB protection group) synchronizing NE2 with the
clock of the BSC.
4-IF1 (standby IF board of a
1+1 HSB protection group)
STM-1 STM-1
NE4
Clock Protection
In this example, a chain network is set up. Thus, only the clock source protection based on
priorities is needed, whereas the SSM or extended SSM protection need not be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.11.1 Configuring the Clock Sources and configure the clock sources.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Paramete Value
r
NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE5 NE6
Step 2 See A.11.9 Querying the Clock Synchronization Status and query the clock synchronization
status of the NEs.
----End
Based on 3.4 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the TDM Radio Ring Network),
configure the clocks according to the following network planning information (as shown in
Figure 6-12):
l The radio transmission network is directly synchronized with the clock of the BSC.
l Clock synchronization signals are transmitted to the BTSs over E1 signals.
E1
NE1
BSC
E1
BTS1 E1
BTS2
E1
NE3
BTS3
Between NE2 and BTS1 9-SP3S The ports are used for
enabling the re-timing
Between NE2 and BTS2 9-SP3S function so that the BTS can
be more precisely
synchronized with the clock
of the BSC.
Between NE3 and BTS3 9-SP3S This port is used for enabling
the re-timing function so that
the BTS can be more
precisely synchronized with
the clock of the BSC.
Between NE4 and BTS4 9-SP3S This port is used for enabling
the re-timing function so that
the BTS can be more
precisely synchronized with
the clock of the BSC.
BSC
NE2 NE4
3-IF1-1/ 4-IF1-1/
Internal Internal
NE3
Clock
3-IF1-1/
Internal
Clock Protection
In this example, a PDH radio ring network is set up. Thus, only the clock source protection based
on priorities is needed, whereas the SSM or extended SSM protection need not be configured.
In application, the external clock port, rather than the E1 port, is preferred to transmit the timing reference signal
to a BTS.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.11.1 Configuring the Clock Sources and configure the clock sources.
Parameter Value
Step 2 See A.16 Setting the Parameters of PDH Ports and set the PDH port parameters.
Parameter Value
Step 3 See A.11.9 Querying the Clock Synchronization Status and query the clock synchronization
status of the NEs.
NE Clock Working Mode of all the NEs should be Tracing Mode.
----End
FE
BTS2
GE GE
FE NE4
BTS3
FE
NE3 NE2 NE1 BSC
FE BTS1
FE
NE6 NE5
BTS5 BTS4
Between NE1 and the BSC 7-EM4F-3 (main port of a The ports are used to
LAG) synchronizing NE1 with the
clock of the BSC.
7-EM4F-4 (slave port of a
LAG)
Between NE2 and NE1 3-IFU2 (main IF board of a 1 The ports are used to
+1 HSB protection group) synchronizing NE2 with the
clock of the BSC.
4-IFU2 (standby IF board of
a 1+1 HSB protection group)
Figure 6-15 Networking diagram (clock for a Hybrid radio chain network)
3-IFU2-1/
Internal
GE
NE4 GE
Clock
NOTE
Separately configure the Ethernet clock source for each link in the LAG.
Clock Protection
In this example, a chain network is set up. Thus, only the clock source protection based on
priorities is needed, whereas the SSM or extended SSM protection need not be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.11.1 Configuring the Clock Sources and configure the clock sources.
Paramete Value
r
NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE5 NE6
Step 2 See A.11.9 Querying the Clock Synchronization Status and query the clock synchronization
status of the NEs.
NE Clock Working Mode of all the NEs should be Tracing Mode.
----End
Based on 3.6 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid Radio Ring Network),
configure the clocks according to the following network planning information (as shown in
Figure 6-16):
l The radio transmission network is directly synchronized with the clock of the BSC through
a LAG consisting of two GE links.
l Clock synchronization signals are transmitted to the BTSs over FE signals.
GE
NE1
BSC
FE
BTS1 FE
BTS2
FE
NE3
BTS3
Between NE1 and the BSC 7-EM4T-3 (main port of a The ports are used to
LAG) synchronizing NE1 with the
clock of the BSC.
7-EM4T-4 (slave port of a
LAG)
BSC
NE2 NE4
3-IFU2-1/ 4-IFU2-1/
Internal Internal
Clock NE3
3-IFU2-1/
Internal
NOTE
Separately configure the Ethernet clock source for each link in the LAG.
Clock Protection
In this example, a Hybrid radio ring network is set up. Thus, only the clock source protection
based on priorities is needed, whereas the SSM or extended SSM protection need not be
configured.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.11.1 Configuring the Clock Sources and configure the clock sources.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
Step 2 See A.11.9 Querying the Clock Synchronization Status and query the clock synchronization
status of the NEs.
NE Clock Working Mode of all the NEs should be Tracing Mode.
----End
The OptiX RTN 910 provides multiple auxiliary ports and functions. These functions require
certain data configuration.
Orderwire
The OptiX RTN 910 supports one orderwire phone so that the operation or maintenance
engineers at different workstations can perform voice communication through microwave or
SDH overhead bytes.
When using the orderwire phone, take the following precautions:
l The orderwire phone numbers of all the NEs on the network must be of the same length.
It is recommended that the orderwire telephone number is a 3-digit number and all orderwire
telephone numbers on the entire network are unique.
l The dialing method of the orderwire phone of each node is dual-tone multifrequency.
l The call waiting time of each node should be set to the same value. If less than 30 nodes
exist in the orderwire subnet, it is recommended that you set the call waiting time to five
seconds. If more than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it is recommended that you
set the call waiting time to nine seconds.
l The equipment supports the orderwire group call function. When one set of the OptiX RTN
equipment dials the orderwire group call number "888", the orderwire phones of all the
OptiX equipment on the orderwire subnet ring. When an orderwire phone receives the call,
the orderwire phones on the other NEs stop ringing. In this case, the orderwire point-to-
multipoint group call changes to a point-to-point ordinary orderwire call.
l When the orderwire signals are transmitted over a radio link, they are always transmitted
through one customized overhead byte. When the orderwire signals are transmitted over
SDH fibers, they are transmitted through the E1 or E2 byte.
l By default, all the line ports, IF ports, and unconfigured synchronous data ports on the
equipment function as the orderwire ports. Therefore, in normal cases, the orderwire ports
needs to be configured only at the edge of the orderwire subnet.
l The equipment supports the transmission of orderwire overhead bytes through the 64 kbit/
s synchronous data ports or external clock ports.
l If multiple radio links or optical transmission lines exist between two NEs, the ports
corresponding to these links should be configured as the orderwire ports. In this case, except
for the hybrid radio links in N+1 protection, if one radio link is available between two NEs,
the orderwire transmission between two NEs is normal. When the orderwire signals are
transmitted over the hybrid radio links in N+1 protection, the protection link cannot transmit
the orderwire signals.
l The equipment provides the orderwire ports on the SCC, cross-connect and clock board.
For definitions of the pins on the ports, see the OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware
Description.
When using the synchronous data service, take the following precautions:
l The synchronous data service is fully transparently transmitted, and the transmission rate
at the port is 64 kbit/s.
l The synchronous data service is clock-sensitive. If the clock is not synchronized, bit errors
occur.
l The ports on the equipment comply with ITU-T G.703.
l When the orderwire signals are transmitted over a radio link, they are always transmitted
through one customized overhead byte. When the orderwire signals are transmitted over
SDH fibers, they are always transmitted through the F1 byte.
l The equipment supports the transmission of the overhead bytes in the synchronous data
service through the external clock ports to realize the service spanning function.
l When the synchronous data service is transmitted over the protected radio links or optical
transmission lines, the synchronous data service is also protected.
l The equipment provides the synchronous data service ports on the SCC, cross-connect and
clock board. For definitions of the pins on the ports, see the OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware
Description.
Wayside E1 Services
The OptiX RTN 910 supports one wayside E1 service. The transmitted overhead bytes in the
STM-1 radio signals can be used for transmitting one wayside E1 service between two sites in
one hop of STM-1 radio link.
External Alarms
External alarms are also called Boolean alarms or relay alarms. The OptiX RTN 910 provides
4-input 2-output3-input 1-output external alarms.
Figure 7-1 shows the port circuits of the input external alarms. When the external relay is
switched off, the port circuit generates a high-level signal. When the external relay is switched
on, the port circuit generates a low-level signal. The board generates the corresponding alarm
based on the level that is generated by the port circuit. Input external alarms are mainly used for
accessing the relay alarms generated by the environmental alarm generator.
The port circuits for the output external alarms function the same as the external system shown
in Figure 7-1. When the external alarm output conditions specified for the NE are met, the NE
drives the relay to turn on or off the switch according to the conditions that result the alarm.
Otherwise, the NE drives the relay to change the switch to the reverse status that results in the
alarm. Output external alarms are mainly used for indicating the alarm status of the equipment
that is contained by the centralized alarming devices.
The equipment provides the external alarm ports on the SCC, cross-connect and clock board.
For definitions of the pins on the ports, see the OptiX RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description.
1+0
1+1
NE4 E1
1+0
NE3 NE2 NE1
1+0
NE6 NE5
Between NE1 and NE2 3-IFU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
4-IFU2 (standby IF board)
Between NE2 and NE1 3-IFU2 (main IF board) Configure the ports as a 1+1
HSB protection group.
4-IFU2 (standby IF board)
1+0
104 1+1
NE4
1+0 E1
NE3 NE2 NE1
1+0
101
102
103
NE6 NE5
105
106
NE Orderwire Port
NE1 3-IFU2-1
4-IFU2-1
NE2 3-IFU2-1
4-IFU2-1
F1
NE3 3-IFU2-1
4-IFU2-1
F1
NE Orderwire Port
NE4 3-IFU2-1
NE5 3-IFU2-1
4-IFU2-1
NE6 3-IFU2-1
NOTE
l An external clock port can also be used to realize service spanning between NE2 and NE3. In this case, the
external clock port needs to be added to the orderwire port through the NMS.
l Certain orderwire ports are unnecessary. These ports do not, however, affect the orderwire phones if they
do not receive orderwire signaling.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.18.1 Configuring the Orderwire and configure the orderwire.
Paramete Value
r
NE1 NE2 NE3 NE4 NE5 NE6
Call 5 5 5 5 5 5
Waiting
Time(s)
----End
1+0
1+1
3rd party ETH
equipment NE4 E1 64kbps
1+0
NE3 NE2 NE1 64k/ETH
1+0
ETH Converter
64kbps
NE6 NE5
64k/ETH
Converter
Between NE1 and NE2 3-IFU2 (main IF board of a 1 Configure the main IF board
+1 protection group) to transmit synchronous data
services.
Between NE2 and NE1 3-IFU2 (main IF board of a 1 Configure the main IF board
+1 protection group) to transmit synchronous data
services.
l In this example, the TDM service between NE2 and NE3 is forwarded through the E1 line.
Therefore, service spanning is required. The two synchronous data ports between NE2 and
NE3 are interconnected with each other to realize the service spanning function.
l According to the service path, you can obtain the synchronous data service information
provided in Table 7-13.
NE1 F1 3-IFU2-1
NE2 3-IFU2-1 F1
NE3 F1 4-IFU2-1
NE6 3-IFU2-1 F1
NOTE
l The external clock port can also be used to realize service spanning between NE2 and NE3.
l In the case of radio links or SDH optical transmission lines configured with 1+1 protection, only the active
link is configured with the synchronous data service.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.18.2 Configuring the Synchronous Data Service and configure the synchronous data
services.
Parameter Value
----End
1+0
1+1
3rd party ETH
equipment NE4 E1 RS-232
1+0
NE3 NE2 NE1 RS-232/ETH
1+0
ETH Converter
RS-232
NE6 NE5
RS-232/ETH
Converter
Between NE1 and NE2 3-IFU2 (main IF board of a 1 Configure the main IF board
+1 protection group) to transmit asynchronous
data services.
Between NE2 and NE1 3-IFU2 (main IF board of a 1 Configure the main IF board
+1 protection group) to transmit asynchronous
data services.
l In this example, the TDM service between NE2 and NE3 is forwarded through the E1 line.
Therefore, service spanning is required. The two asynchronous data ports between NE2
and NE3 are interconnected with each other to realize the service spanning function.
l In this example, the SDH equipment is not required to jointly transmit the asynchronous
data service. Hence, the overhead byte is set to SERIAL1 by default.
l According to the service path, you can obtain the asynchronous data service information
provided in Table 7-19.
NOTE
l The external clock port can also be used to realize service spanning between NE2 and NE3.
l In the case of radio links or SDH optical transmission lines configured with 1+1 protection, only the active
link is configured with the asynchronous data service.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.18.3 Configuring the Asynchronous Data Service and configure the asynchronous data
services.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
----End
use the protocol converter to convert the network management information carried by the
Ethernet network into the network management information carried by the wayside E1 service.
To maximize the bandwidth utilization, the NEs transmit the service over the wayside E1
channel.
According to the service path, you can obtain the wayside E1 service information provided in
Table 7-20.
NOTE
In the case of radio links configured with 1+1 or N+1 protection, only the active link is configured with the
wayside E1 service.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.18.4 Configuring the Wayside E1 Service and configure the wayside E1 service.
Parameter Value
NE1 NE2
----End
Input 1
Smoke sensor
Input 2
NE1
Output 1
Water sensor Input 3
Magnetic door
Centralized
switch sensor
alarming box
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 supports the automatic mode and the manual mode. The manual mode is used for
commissioning the output alarms.
Procedure
Step 1 See A.18.5 Configure External Alarms and configure the external alarms.
l The values for the input alarm parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE1
Alarm Mode Relay Turns On/ Relay Turns On/ Relay Turns On/
Low Level Low Level Low Level
l The values for the output alarm parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter Value
NE1
----End
During the equipment commissioning and operating phases, you need to add or modify certain
configuration data according to the actual requirements.
Creating NEs When using the NMS A.1.1 Creating NEs by l Generally, NEs are
to perform centralized Using the Search created by
management of NEs, Method or A.1.2 searching for the
create the icons of the Creating NEs by Using NE on the NMS.
NEs to be managed at the Manual Method l The manual NE
corresponding creation method is
positions on the Main applicable only
Topology. when several NEs
need to be created
on a large radio
transmission
network.
Synchronizing After you conduct the A.1.6 Synchronizing To ensure that the NE
NE time settings on the NMS, the NE Time time is synchronized
the NE time is correctly, the time
synchronized and time domain of
automatically and the NMS server must
periodically. You can be set correctly.
also synchronize the
NE time manually if
the NE time is lost due
to NE faults.
CAUTION
When you add or modify the configurations of a radio link, you need to modify the configurations
of the NE that is located far from the NMS server and then modify the configurations of the NE
that is located near to the NMS server.
NOTE
l In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD protection, you need to configure only the IF/ODU information of the main
radio link.
l In the case of 1+1 FD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the main radio link
and the ODU information of the standby radio link.
l In the case of XPIC configuration, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the two radio
links in different polarization directions separately.
l In the case of N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the N+1 radio links
respectively.
Changing the You need to change the 1. A.10.4 Deleting If the capacity of the
radio working radio working mode of Cross-Connections existing TDM
mode of a a TDM radio link, if the services exceeds the
TDM radio link TDM radio link does capacity of the TDM
not meet the service radio link after the
capacity requirements. change, you need to
delete the cross-
connections of the
excessive TDM
services.
Configuring The ATPC function A.8.4 Configuring the To enable the ATPC
the ATPC needs to be enabled for IF/ODU Information function, set ATPC
function the radio link or the of a Radio Link Enable Status to
values of ATPC Enabled and change
parameters need to be other ATPC
changed. parameter values
according to the
planning
information.
Changing the You can change the A.8.4 Configuring the In Power Attributes
transmit power transmit power if the IF/ODU Information of the ODU, change
fading margin is of a Radio Link TX Power(dBm) or
insufficient but the parameter values
transmit power can still associated with
be increased. power.
Changing the When the original A.8.4 Configuring the l Before using the
modulation modulation scheme IF/ODU Information new modulation
scheme of a does not meet the of a Radio Link scheme, contact
Hybrid radio service requirements, the network
link you need to use another planning
modulation scheme. department to
confirm that the
Hybrid radio link
supports the new
Guaranteed
Capacity
Modulation and
Full Capacity
Modulation.
l Ensure that the
parameter values
are the same at
both ends of the
Hybrid radio link.
Changing the To adjust the number A.8.4 Configuring the l If E1s decrease,
number of E1s of E1s and Ethernet IF/ODU Information you need to release
on a Hybrid bandwidth, you need to of a Radio Link the timeslots on
radio link change the number of the IF board and
E1s on the Hybrid then delete cross-
radio link. connections
before changing
Specified Max E1
Capacity. For
example, the
services on a
Hybrid radio link
required five E1
previously and
currently requires
only four E1s. In
this case, you need
to release the fifth
timeslot on the IF
board and then
change Specified
Max E1
Capacity to 4.
l Ensure that the
parameter values
are the same at
both ends of the
Hybrid radio link.
A Task Collection
Configurations of Ethernet services and features include Ethernet port configuration, protection
configuration, service configuration, protocol configuration, and OAM configuration.
A.13 Using the RMON
The remote monitoring (RMON) is mainly used to monitor the data traffic on a network segment
or on the entire network. Currently, it is one of the widely used network management standards.
A.14 Setting the Parameters of ODU Ports
This section describes how to configure the parameters of ODU ports, including the transmit
frequency attribute, power attribute, ODU attribute, and advanced attributes.
A.15 Setting the Parameters of SDH Ports
The parameters of SDH ports are used to configure the loopback on the SDH interface bboard
and the laser status.
A.16 Setting the Parameters of PDH Ports
The parameters of PDH ports are used to configure the tributary loopback, service load
indication, and tributary retiming.
A.17 Configuring Overhead Bytes
Generally, the default overload bytes can meet the requirements of the device. In certain special
application scenarios, however, such as device interconnection, you need to change the overload
bytes according to the requirements of the interconnected device.
A.18 Configuring Auxiliary Ports and Functions
The auxiliary ports and functions supported by the OptiX RTN 910 include the orderwire,
synchronous data service, asynchronous data service, wayside E1 service, and external alarm.
A.19 Testing the Protection Switching
By testing the protection switching, you can check whether the protection switching is normal
over radio links.
A.20 Testing the AM Switching
By testing the AM switching, you can check whether the AM switching is normal over radio
links.
Prerequisite
l The communication between the NMS and the NE must be normal.
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.
NOTE
l When Address Type is set to NSAP Address, ensure that the U2000 is installed with the OSI protocol
stack software.
l When Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE, and the U2000
server and gateway NE are not in the same network segment, ensure that the IP routes of the network
segments to which the U2000 server and gateway NE belong are configured on the U2000 and related
routers.
3. Click OK.
l If Create NE after search is selected, you need to specify NE User and Password.
l You can select either Create NE after search or Upload after Create or both Create NE after search and
Upload after Create. In this manner, after the NE searching is complete, the system automatically creates
an NE and uploads the NE.
Step 5 Click Start Search, and then the Auto Discovery dialog box is displayed.
After the search is complete, all the NEs that are found are displayed in the Result list.
Step 7 Optional: Repeat Step 6 to create other NEs that are not created.
----End
Related References
B.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The communication between the NMS and the NE to be created must be normal.
l If the NE to be created is a non-gateway NE, the gateway NE to which the NE to be created
belongs must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Physical View, right-click New > NE.
The Add Object dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 910 from the Object Tree.
Step 3 Enter the following information: ID, Extended ID, Name, and Remarks.
Step 4 Set Gateway Type for the NE.
----End
Related References
B.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l All the boards must be installed correctly.
Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the NE icon to open the NE layout diagram.
Step 2 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be added, right-click, and then select Add
XXX. XXX is the name of the board to be added.
Step 3 Optional: On the slot to which the board is to be deleted, right-click, and then select Delete.
1. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation, click OK.
2. A dialog box is displayed again for confirmation, click OK.
NOTE
Before deleting the board, delete the data, such as the service, clock, orderwire, and protection, on the
board.
----End
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be modified.
----End
Related References
B.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology, select the NE whose name is to be modified, and then right-click.
Step 2 Select the Object Attributes, then, the Attributes dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Click the NE Attribute [xxx] tab.
NOTE
Step 5 Click OK, and then close the dialog box that is displayed indicating the operation result.
The new name of the NE is displayed below the NE icon in the Main Topology.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NMS server, the time zone
and time must be set correctly on the PC or server that is installed with the NMS software.
l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server, the time on
the NTP server must be set correctly and the NTP protocol must be normal.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the
Main Menu.
Step 2 Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.
Step 3 In the physical view, select the NE whose time needs to be synchronized, and then click
.
Step 4 When you need to synchronize the NE time with the NMS time, set the time synchronization
mode and the related parameters.
1. Set Synchronous Mode to NM.
2. Optional: The NE time is synchronized with the NMS time immediately.
a. Right-click the NE whose time needs to be synchronized, and then choose
Synchronize with NM Time from the short-cut menu.
b. Click Apply.
c. In the dialog box that is displayed for confirmation, click Yes.
d. Close the dialog box that is displayed indicating the operation result.
NOTE
l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the NMS time, set Synchronous Mode to NM.
l When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server, set Synchronous Mode to
Standard NTP. Configure Standard NTP Authentication according to the requirements of the NTP server.
Step 5 When you need to synchronize the NE time with the time on the NTP server, set the time
synchronization mode and the related parameters.
1. Set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP.
2. Configure Standard NTP Authentication according to the requirements of the NTP
server.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click Close, and then close the dialog box that is displayed indicating the operation result.
5. Configure the upper-layer NTP server.
a. Select the NE, right-click in the configuration box where the standard NTP server is
configured, and then choose New.
c. Click Apply.
d. Close the dialog box that is displayed indicating the operation result.
6. Optional: Copy the configuration of the upper-layer NTP server.
a. Select the NE to be copied, right-click, and then choose Copy Standard NTP
Server.
b. Select the NE to be pasted, right-click, and then choose Paste Standard NTP
Server.
c. In the dialog box that is displayed for confirmation, click Yes.
d. Close the dialog box that is displayed indicating the operation result.
----End
Related References
B.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Localization Management
from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click
Step 3 Click the Time Zone drop-down list, and then set the time zone of the NE.
Step 4 Optional: Click DST, and then configure the related parameters.
Step 5 Click Apply, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l Set Synchronous Mode used by the NE to Standard NTP and Standard NTP
Authentication to Enabled.
l The NTP protocol is normal and the NTP identity authentication is enabled on the NTP
server.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the
Main Menu.
Step 2 Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.
Step 3 In the physical view, select the NE whose NTP keys need to be configured, and then click
.
Step 4 Click Add.
The Add Key and Password dialog box is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management
Uploading the NE data is commonly used for configuring the NE data. By uploading the NE
data, the data such as the configuration, alarm, and performance data of the NE is uploaded to
the NMS.
Prerequisite
l An NE must be logged in to successfully.
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding operation steps according to the status of the NE.
Step 2 In the displayed NE Configuration Wizard dialog box, select Upload, and then click Next.
A dialog box is displayed for confirmation.
Step 3 Click OK.
Step 4 Click Close.
Step 5 Choose Configuration > NE Configuration Data Management from the Main Menu.
Step 6 Select the NE whose data needs to be uploaded from the Object Tree, and then click .
Step 7 Select the NE, click Upload, a dialog box is displayed for confirmation, and then click OK.
The uploading is started. After the uploading is complete, the Operation Result dialog box is
displayed.
Step 8 Click Close.
----End
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree, and then choose Performance > NE
Performance Monitoring Time from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Configure the parameters of the performance monitoring of NEs.
1. Select 15-Minute or 24-Hour.
2. Select Enabled or Disabled in Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring.
3. Set the start time and end time of the performance monitoring of NEs.
NOTE
l Generally, both Set 15-Minute Monitoring and Set 24-Hour Monitoring are enabled.
l You can specify the start time of the performance monitoring function, only after selecting Enable in
the Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring area.
l You can specify the end time of the performance monitoring function, only after selecting Enable and
then selecting To in the Set 15-Minute Monitoring or Set 24-Hour Monitoring area.
4. Click Apply, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
A.4.1 Creating an Optical Transmission Line or Radio Link by Using the Search Method
Through the search method, the NMS can check the information about the radio link that is
connected to a specified IF port. In this manner, a radio link can be created rapidly. The search
method is commonly used for creating a radio link.
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The IF boards of various NEs must be created on the NMS.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Discovery > Fiber from the Main Menu.
Step 2 Select the board of the NE on which the fiber needs to be searched for or the IF board of the NE
on which radio links need to be searched for from the Subject Tree.
Step 3 Click Search.
NOTE
l If Do not search the ports with Fiber/Cable created on NMS is selected, the port whose radio link
is created is not searched on the NMS.
l If you need to check whether the connection of a created radio link is the same as the actual connection
of the radio link, do not select Do not search the ports with Fiber/Cable created on NMS.
l If Do not search the ports with Fiber/Cable created on NMS is selected and all the selected ports
are created with radio links, a dialog box is displayed after the search, indicating that the search domain
is null.
Step 4 After the operation is complete, a dialog box is displayed indicating that the operation is
successful. Then, click Close.
Step 5 In Physical Fiber/Cable Link List, select one or multiple optical transmission lines or radio
links, and then click Create Fiber/Cable.
NOTE
l When you select one or multiple optical transmission lines or radio links from Physical Fiber/Cable
Link List, the conflicting optical transmission lines or radio links are automatically displayed in
Logical Fiber/Cable Link List. In this manner, you need to delete such conflicting optical transmission
lines or radio links by referring to Step 5, and then create the links.
l When you create an optical transmission line or radio link, if the selected optical transmission line or
radio link is in the Already created state, No fiber to create is displayed.
Step 6 When you select one or multiple conflicting optical transmission lines or radio links from
Logical Fiber/Cable Link List, click Delete Fiber/Cable.
----End
Subsequent Handling
If the information about the optical transmission line or radio link that is created through the
search method, you can supplement the information by changing the information about the
optical transmission line or cable.
Related References
B.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The IF boards of various NEs must be created on the NMS.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Add Object dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Choose Link > Microwave Link from the Object Tree.
Step 3 Configure the attributes of the created radio link according to the data plan.
----End
Related References
B.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The board to be connected with the optical transmission line or cable must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Add Object dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Configure the attributes of the created SDH optical transmission link according to the data plan.
----End
Related References
B.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Add Object dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Choose Link > Extended ECC.
Step 3 Configure the attributes of the created extended ECC according to the data plan.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding IF board must be added on the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology, choose File > Create > Link.
The Add Object dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Select Link > Microwave Back to Back.
Step 3 Select the source NE from the drop-down list of Source NE.
Step 4 Select the sink NE from the drop-down list of Sink NE.
Step 5 Configure the attributes of the back-to-back radio connection.
----End
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology, right-click, and then choose New > Subnet.
The Add Object dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click the Properties tab.
Step 3 Enter the attributes of the subnet.
Step 4 Click the Select Object tab, select a created NE from Available Objects, and then click
NOTE
l Click to add the selected object in the left pane to the right pane.
l Click to add all the objects in the left pane to the right pane.
----End
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology, right-click the NE or subnet that needs to be copied.
Step 2 Choose Edit > Copy to.
The Copy Object dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Select the subnet that the NE or subnet needs to be pasted.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Main Topology, right-click the NE or subnet that needs to be moved.
Step 2 Choose Edit > Move to.
Step 3 Select the subnet that the NE or subnet needs to be moved to.
----End
The VLAN ID used by an inband DCN must be different from the VLAN ID used by services
and the bandwidth by an inband DCN must meet the requirements of the transmission network
for managing messages.
A.6.11 Configuring the Enable Status of the Inband DCN Function on Ports
The network management information can be transmitted over a link by the inband DCN only
when the inband DCN function is enabled on the ports at both ends of the link.
A.6.12 Configuring the Protocol Type of the Inband DCN
The inband DCN supports two types of protocol: IP and HWECC. The IP is the default protocol
supported by the inband DCN. Generally, it is recommended that you use the default value.
A.6.13 Querying ECC Routes
By querying ECC routes, you can check whether the correct HWECC solution is configured and
whether the communication between NEs is normal.
A.6.14 Querying IP Routes
By querying IP routes, you can check whether the IP over DCC solution and inband DCN
solution is configured correctly and whether the communication between NEs is normal.
A.6.15 Querying OSI Routes
By querying OSI routes, you can check whether the OSI over DCC solution is configured
correctly and whether the communication between NEs is normal.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Configure the communication parameters of the NE.
Step 3 Click Apply, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
NOTE
When you configure multiple parameters, click Apply respectively.
----End
Related References
B.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
Management from the Function Tree.
1. Double-click the cell in the Protocol Type column to which the DCC corresponds. Select
the required protocol type from the drop-down list.
2. Click Apply.
NOTE
In this figure, 1-CSHC-1 corresponds to the external clock interface on the CSHC board in slot 1.
3. Click OK.
----End
Related References
B.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the
Function Tree.
Step 3 Set other parameters when the ECC extended mode is set to the specified mode.
Step 4 Click Apply. A dialog box is displayed indicating that this operation will reset the
communication between NEs.
----End
Related References
B.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
The DCC bytes required by the transparent transmission function must not be used.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
Management from the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol
Stack Management from the Function Tree.
NOTE
The created static route has a lower priority than a dynamic route.
----End
Related References
B.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol
Stack Management from the Function Tree.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol
Stack Management from the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.3.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
Management from the Function Tree.
NOTE
When Configuration Role is set to L2, the NE has the functions of the L1 role and the L2 role.
----End
Related References
B.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
Management from the Function Tree.
Step 6 Configure the attributes of the OSI tunnel according to the network planning.
----End
Related References
B.3.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
Management from the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Port Settings tab.
Step 3 Select FE/GE.
Step 4 Configure the enable status of the inband DCN function on ports.
----End
Related References
B.3.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding board must be added to the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Protocol Settings tab.
Step 3 Set the protocol type of the inband DCN.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.3.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC
Link Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Check whether the ECC route and related parameters are set correctly in NE ECC Link
Management List.
----End
Related References
B.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol
Stack Management from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Click Query. Then, close the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 4 Check whether the IP routes and related parameters in the routing table are in accordance with
the planning information.
----End
Related References
B.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
Management from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Check whether the information in Link Adjacency Table meets the planning requirements.
Step 4 Click the L1 Routing tab to check whether the information about the L1 routes is correct.
Step 5 Click the L2 Routing tab to check whether the information about the L2 routes is correct.
----End
Related References
B.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Context
l If the LCT requests to log in to an NE to which the NMS has logged in, the NE determines
whether to permit the login of the LCT according to the status of LCT Access Control
Switch.
l If the LCT requests to log in to an NE to which the NMS has not logged in, the NE permits
the login of the LCT regardless of the status of LCT Access Control Switch. The NMS,
however, can log in to an NE to which the LCT has logged in. That is, the login of the LCT
does not affect the login of the NMS. After the NMS user logs in to the NE successfully,
the logged LCT user is not affected. If LCT Access Control Switch is set to Disable
Access, the logged LCT user is also not affected.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Security > LCT Access
Control from the Function Tree.
----End
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Background Information
l It is recommended that the LCT accesses an NE through Ethernet ports.
l If you need to initialize an NE or perform software loading by using the LCT, the LCT
needs to access the NE through Ethernet ports.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication >
Access Control from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Set the status of the network port to Enabled and enable the Ethernet access function of the NE.
NOTE
To disable the Ethernet access function of an NE, set the status of the network port to Disabled.
Step 4 Click OK. Then, close the operation result dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Context
If the LCT cannot access an NE through serial interfaces when the Enable Serial Port Access
check box is selected, the LCT access function may be disabled.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication >
Access Control from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the Enable Serial Port Access check box and select Access NM.
Step 3 Click Apply. and then close the displayed prompt dialog box.
Step 4 Optional: Select the baud rate of the serial interface from the Baud Rate drop-down list. Click
Apply, and then close the displayed prompt dialog box.
----End
To configure the ATPC function, set the ATPC attributes of the IF board.
A.8.7 Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes
By configuring the Hybrid/AM attributes, you can set the working mode of the Hybrid IF boards.
A.8.8 Creating an N+1 Protection Group
When multiple STM-1 or Hybrid microwave services are transmitted in the point-to-point mode,
you can adopt the N+1 protection configuration.
A.8.9 Querying the ATPC Adjustment Records
By querying the ATPC adjustment records, you can be familiar with the running status of the
ATPC function.
A.8.10 Querying the History Transmit Power and Receive Power
Querying the change trend of the history transmit power and receive power can provide reference
for radio link troubleshooting.
A.8.11 Querying the AM Status
By querying the AM status, you can trace the change of the modulation mode when the AM
function is used.
A.8.12 Querying the IF 1+1 Protection Status
You can learn about the current information of the IF 1+1 protection by querying the IF 1+1
protection status.
A.8.13 Querying the IF N+1 Protection Status
You can learn about the current information of the IF N+1 protection by querying the IF N+1
protection status.
A.8.14 IF 1+1 Protection Switching
You can perform external switching on the IF 1+1 protection by performing IF 1+1 protection
switching.
A.8.15 IF N+1 Protection Switching
You can perform external switching on the IF N+1 protection by performing IF N+1 protection
switching.
A.8.16 Starting/Stopping the N+1 Protection Protocol
If you stop the N+1 protection protocol and then restart it, the N+1 protection protocol can be
restored to the initial state.
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the
NE Panel.
l The IF boards of an IF 1+1 FD/SD protection group must be configured in two paired slots.
Background Information
When a 1+0 service is converted into a 1+1 HSB protection through the configuration of the IF
1+1 protection group, the original service is not interrupted. The board where the original service
exists, however, needs to be set to the working board.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
Step 4 Click OK, and then close the dialog box that is displayed indicating the operation result.
----End
Related References
B.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The IFX2 boards and the ODUs to which the IFX2 boards are connected must be added on
the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.4.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The XPIC protection group must be created.
Background Information
The IFX2 board (XPIC IF board) supports Hybrid radio. Therefore, the Hybrid/AM attributes
can be set for the IFX2 board.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 4 Configure the Hybrid/AM attributes of the XPIC Hybrid radio link.
----End
Related References
B.4.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the
NE Panel.
Precautions
l In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD protection, you need to configure only the IF/ODU information
of the main radio link.
l In the case of 1+1 FD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the
main radio link and the ODU information of the standby radio link.
l In the case of XPIC configuration, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the
two radio links in different polarization directions separately.
l In the case of N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of the N+1
radio links respectively.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from
the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding IF board must be added on the NE Panel.
Context
l The IF1 board is used for TDM microwave.
l The IFU2 board is used for Hybrid.
l The IFX2 board is used for XPIC Hybrid.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the IF Attributes tab.
----End
Related References
B.11.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding IF board must be added on the NE Panel.
Precautions
l For the IF boards that are configured with 1+1 protection, configure only the ATPC
attributes of the main IF board.
l The following procedure describes the configuration of ATPC parameters in the IF interface
configuration dialog box of the IF board. You can also configure ATPC parameters in the
following configuration dialog boxes:
– Create an XPIC working group
– IF/ODU configuration
NOTE
In the IF/ODU configuration dialog box, the ATPC adjustment thresholds cannot be changed.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.11.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding IF board must be added on the NE Panel.
Background Information
The OptiX RTN 910 supports the Hybrid/AM function and the corresponding IF boards are
IFU2 and IFX2.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a Hybrid IF board from the Object Tree and then choose
Configuration > Hybrid/AM Configuration from the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.11.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the
NE Panel.
l The IF1 boards must work in the STM-1 mode.
Background Information
l When an N+0 service is converted into an N+1 service through the configuration of the N
+1 protection group, the original service is not interrupted.
l In the case of Hybrid radio links, the Hybrid/AM attributes must be the same for all the N
+1 radio links in the N+1 protection group.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
Step 4 Configure the mapping relation between the board and the slot.
1. Select Work Unit from Select Mapping Direction.
2. Select a port to which a working channel corresponds from Select Mapping Way, and then
click .
3. Repeat Step 4.2 to select the ports to which other working channels correspond. Click
.
4. Select Protection Unit from Select Mapping Direction.
5. Select a port to which a protection channel corresponds from Select Mapping Way, and
then click .
Step 5 Click OK. Click OK to close the confirmation dialog box that is displayed. Then, click OK to
close the dialog box that is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
----End
Related References
B.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding IF board must be added.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query to query the running information of the ATPC function.
----End
Related References
B.11.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding IF boards and the ODUs connected to the IF boards must be added to
the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Performance Graph Analyze from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Specify the start time and end time of a specific time span.
NOTE
The time span starts from the last routine maintenance time to the current time.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding IF boards must be added in the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select a Hybrid IF board from the Object Tree and then choose
Configuration > Hybrid/AM Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Hybrid/AM Configuration tab.
Step 3 Click Query.
Step 4 Query the AM status.
----End
Related References
B.11.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query, and then close the displayed prompt dialog box. In Protection Group, check the
IF 1+1 protection groups.
Step 3 Select the IF 1+1 protection group whose protection status needs to be queried.
Step 4 Click Query Switch Status, and then close the displayed prompt dialog box. In Slot Mapping
Relation, check the protection status of the IF 1+1 protection group.
----End
Related References
B.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The IF N+1 protection must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query, and then close the displayed prompt dialog box. In Protection Group, check the
IF N+1 protection groups.
Step 3 Select the IF N+1 protection group whose protection status needs to be queried.
Step 4 Click Query Switch Status, and then close the displayed dialog box. In Slot Mapping
Relation, check the IF N+1 protection status.
----End
Related References
B.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The IF 1+1 protection must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
Step 2 In Protection Group, select the protection group for protection switching.
Step 3 In Slot Mapping Relation, select a working unit or the protection unit of the protection group,
and then right-click the selected unit.
Step 4 Choose the required switching mode from the shortcut menu,.
Step 5 Click OK to close the confirmation dialog box that is displayed. Then, click OK to close the
dialog box that is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
Step 6 Click Query Switch Status to check whether the switching operation is successful.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The IF N+1 protection must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
Step 2 In Protection Group, select the protection group for protection switching.
Step 3 In Slot Mapping Relation, select a working unit or the protection unit of the protection group,
and then right-click the selected unit.
Step 4 Choose the required switching mode from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Click OK to close the confirmation dialog box that is displayed. Then, click OK to close the
dialog box that is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
Step 6 Click Query Switch Status to check whether the switching operation is successful.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The IF N+1 protection must be configured.
Precautions
l Stopping the N+1 protection protocol causes a failure of the N+1 protection.
l When services are switched onto the protection channel, stopping the N+1 protection
protocol causes switchover of the services back to the working tunnel. At this time, if the
working channel is normal, the services are transiently interrupted. If the working channel
is faulty, the services are interrupted until the working channel is restored to normal or the
N+1 protection protocol is started.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
Step 2 In Protection Group, select the protection group whose N+1 protection protocol needs to be
started.
Step 3 Click Start Protocol or Stop Protocol. Then, close the displayed prompt dialog box.
Step 4 Click Query to check the protocol status.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding board must be added on the NE Panel.
Background Information
When an unprotected service is converted into a linear MSP service by configuring the linear
MSP, the original services are not interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS
from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Create.
The system displays the Create a Linear Multiplex Section dialog box.
Step 3 Set the parameters of the linear MSP group.
Step 4 Click OK, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Postrequisite
l In the case of the 1:N linear MSP, you need to configure bidirectional cross-connections
between the services and the working channels later. If extra services need to be transmitted,
it is necessary to configure bidirectional cross-connections between the extra services and
the protection channels.
l In the case of the 1+1 linear MSP, you need to configure bidirectional cross-connections
between the services and the working channels later.
Related References
B.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The linear MSP must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS
from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query > Query Protection Group to query the current linear MSP group.
Step 4 Click Query > Query Switching Status, and then close the dialog box that is displayed. In Slot
Mapping Relation, query the status of the linear MSP.
----End
Related References
B.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The linear MSP must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS
from the Function Tree.
Step 2 In Protection Group, select the MSP group to be switched. In Slot Mapping Relation, select
the working unit or protection unit, and then right-click.
Step 3 Right-click and select the required switching mode, and then close the dialog box that is
displayed.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l The linear MSP must be configured.
Precautions
l Stopping the ring MSP protocol causes failure of ring MSP.
l When services are switched onto the protection channel, stopping the ring MSP protocol
causes the services to switch back to the working channel. At this time, if the working
channel is normal, the services are transiently interrupted; if the working channel is faulty,
the services are interrupted until the working channel is restored to normal or the protocol
is started.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS
from the Function Tree.
Step 2 In Protection Group, select the MSP group for which the linear MSP protocol is to be stopped.
Step 3 Click Start Protocol or Stop Protocol, and then close the prompt dialog box that is displayed.
Step 4 Click Query > Query Protection Group to query the Protocol Status.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding source and sink boards must be added on NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Create.
The Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Configure the parameters of a new SDH service.
Step 4 Click OK, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding source and sink boards must be added on NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Create SNCP Service.
The Create SNCP Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Configure the parameters of a new SNCP service.
Step 4 Click OK, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The SNCP protection group must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service
Control from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the SNCP protection group, and then right-click Initiation Condition to which the
working service corresponds.
Step 3 Set the initiation condition for the working service. Click OK.
It is recommended that you set Initiation Condition of the working service to be the same as Initiation
Condition of the protection service.
Step 6 Click Apply, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The cross-connections of the service must be configured and the service must not be used.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Query the related data.
1. Click Query.
Then, a dialog box is displayed, indicating that this operation will update the service data
saved on the NMS.
2. Click OK. Then, close the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 3 Deactivate the service.
1. Right-click the service and choose Deactivate from the shortcut menu.
Then, a dialog box is displayed, querying whether you need to deactivate the selected
service.
2. Click OK.
Then, a dialog box is displayed, indicating that this operation will clear the corresponding
service data on the NE side.
3. Click OK. Then, close the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 5 Click Query. The queried information should show that the cross-connection is already deleted.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The unidirectional cross-connection of the normal service must be configured and the
source of the cross-connection must be a line board.
Background Information
When this task is performed to convert a normal service into an SNCP service, the original
services are not interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Optional: If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in Cross-Connection.
Right-click the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu.
Step 3 Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert to SNCP
Service from the shortcut menu.
Then, a dialog box is displayed, querying whether you need to perform this operation. Then, the
Convert to SNCP Service dialog box is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into
SNCP Services
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The SNCP cross-connection in the receive direction must be configured.
l The current service must be transmitted on the working path.
Background Information
When this task is performed to convert an SNCP service into a normal service, the original
services are not interrupted.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > SDH Service Configuration > Cross-Connection Configuration from the
Function Tree.
Step 2 In Auto-Created Cross-Connection, select the configured service. Right-click and choose
Convert to Non-Protection Service from the shortcut menu.
Then, a dialog box is displayed, querying whether you need to perform this operation.
----End
Postrequisite
You also need to delete the unidirectional cross-connection between the service source and the
working path or the unidirectional cross-connection between the service source and the
protection path. The SNCP service can be converted into the normal service both in the receive
direction and the transmit direction only after the deletion.
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE administrator authority or higher.
l TDM services must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 4 Close the displayed prompt dialog box. In Cross-Connection, query the TDM services.
----End
Related References
B.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The SNCP protection group must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service
Control from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the SNCP protection group for SNCP service switching.
Step 3 Click Function. Select the required switching mode from the displayed menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click OK.
Step 5 The system displays a prompt dialog box, indicating that the operation is successful. Then, close
the displayed prompt dialog box.
Step 6 Choose Function > Query Switch Status to check whether the switching operation is
successful.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The SNCP protection group must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service
Control from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the SNCP protection group whose service protection status needs to be queried.
Step 3 Click Function > Query Switch Status, and then close the displayed prompt dialog box.
----End
Related References
B.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control
Prerequisite
l The NE equipment must be configured with E1 services, and the E1 services must be
transmitted through the DDF.
l The communication between the NMS and the NE must be normal.
Precautions
CAUTION
l When a PRBS test is performed, the services carried on the tested path are interrupted.
l The PRBS test can be performed only in a unidirectional manner and on one path at a time.
Procedure
Step 1 On the NMS, perform an inloop for the corresponding E1 port at the remote site.
1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.
Step 2 At the central site, on the NMS, select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
Step 4 Select the first E1 port, and then set the following PRBS-related parameters:
l Direction: Cross
l Duration: a value from 120 to 180
l Measured in Time: seconds
----End
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock
Source Priority.
By pressing the Ctrl key on the keyboard, you can select multiple clock sources at one time.
Step 7 Optional: Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority of this
clock source.
NOTE
The clock priorities levels are arranged in a descending order from the first row to the last row. The internal
clock source is always of the lowest priority.
Step 8 Optional: Set External Clock Source Mode and Synchronous Status Byte for the external
clock sources.
----End
Related References
B.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The priority list of the clock source must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock
Subnet Configuration.
Step 3 Start the clock protection protocol and configure its parameters.
----End
Related References
B.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The priority level of a clock source must be set.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock
Subnet Configuration.
NOTE
Step 7 Set the clock quality for which the quality level is zero.
NOTE
----End
Related References
B.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The priority level of a clock source must be set.
l The SSM protocol must be enabled or extended.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock
Subnet Configuration.
Step 2 Click the SSM Output Control tab.
Step 3 Set the SSM control status.
----End
Related References
B.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The priority level of a clock source must be set.
l The extended SSM protocol must be enabled.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock
Subnet Configuration.
Step 2 Click the Clock ID Status tab.
Step 3 Set the clock ID control status.
----End
Related References
B.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock.
Step 2 Modify the parameters of the clock output.
----End
Related References
B.7.9 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock
Source Switching.
Step 2 Click the Clock Source Switching Condition tab.
Step 3 Change the conditions for clock source switching.
----End
Related References
B.7.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock
Source Switching.
Step 2 Click the Clock Source Reversion Parameter tab.
----End
Related References
B.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock
Synchronization Status.
----End
Related References
B.7.10 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The Ethernet boards or hybrid IF boards must be added to the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protection > ERPS Management.
Step 2 Click New.
The Create Ethernet Ring Protection Protocol Instance dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the parameters for the ERPS protection instance.
----End
Related References
B.9.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The protection instance of the ERPS must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Optional: Double-click Control VLAN, and then modify the VLAN ID.
----End
Related References
B.9.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.9.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The board on which the LAG port to be created must be added to the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
Step 3 Click New.
The system displays the Create Link Aggregation Group dialog box.
Step 4 Set the attributes of the LAG in Attribute Settings.
Hold on the Ctrl key or the Shift key on the keyboard to select multiple ports.
4. Click OK. A dialog box is displayed for confirmation. Click OK. Then, a dialog box is
displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Close this dialog box.
----End
Related References
B.9.2.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The board on which the LAG to be created must be added to NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Port Priority tab.
Step 3 Set the port priority.
Step 4 Click Apply, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.9.2.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The LAG must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
Step 3 Click Query. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Then, close
this dialog box.
Step 4 In the Main Interface, select the LAG to be queried.
The system displays the information about the slave port in the lower part of the Main Interface.
Step 6 Right-click on the selected LAG and choose the specific information about the LAG from the
shortcut menu.
Step 8 Click Query. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Close this
dialog box.
Step 9 Query the port priority of the LAG.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The Ethernet board must be added on the NE Panel.
l On associated ports, the Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.9.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The Ethernet board must be added on the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New.
The New E-Line Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Configure Direction of the E-Line service.
Step 4 Configure the attributes of the E-Line service.
NOTE
----End
Related References
B.9.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding Ethernet board must be added to NE Panel.
l The UNI-UNI E-Line service must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
Step 4 Set the attributes of the new VLAN forwarding table item.
Step 5 Click OK. Then, close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.9.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The Ethernet board must be added on the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New.
The New E-LAN Service dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Configure the attributes of the bridge.
NOTE
Step 4 Configure the port that is mounted to the bridge on the UNI side of the E-LAN service.
1. Click the UNI tab.
2. Click Configuration, and then select the port that needs to be mounted to the bridge in the
Configure Port dialog box that is displayed.
TIP
3. Click .
4. Optional: Configure the attributes of the port that needs to be mounted to the bridge in the
Selected Ports dialog box.
NOTE
This step takes effect only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared.
2. Click New, then the New Split Horizon Group dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the port to be added from Available Port List and then click .
NOTE
To select more than one port at a time, press and hold the Ctrl key when selecting the ports.
3. Click OK.
----End
Related References
B.9.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The E-LAN services must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
l To add or delete ports connected to the VB on the UNI side, click the UNI tab.
l To add or delete ports connected to the VB on the NNI side, click the NNI tab.
1. Click Configuration. In the Configure Port dialog box that is displayed, select the port
to be added to or deleted from the list of ports connected to the VB.
2. Optional: Click to add ports to the list of ports connected to the VB.
3. Optional: Click to delete ports from the list of ports connected to the VB.
TIP
To select more than one port at a time, press and hold the Ctrl key when selecting the ports.
4. In Selected Port List, set the attributes of the ports connected to the VB.
5. Click OK. Then, close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The E-Line service must be configured and the service is not used.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 3 Select the Ethernet-line service that needs to be deleted and then click Delete.
Then, a dialog box is displayed, querying whether you need to perform this operation.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l A configured E-LAN service is not required.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click Query. Then, close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Prerequisite
Ethernet services must be configured.
NOTE
It is recommended that you test low-priority Ethernet services in good weather conditions, where the AM
function works in the highest modulation mode.
NE 2 PORT 2
VLAN ID=100
NE 1
PORT 1
NE 3
PORT 3
Microwave network
VLAN ID=200
The VLAN ID of the Ethernet service from NE2 to NE1 is 100, and the VLAN ID of the Ethernet
service from NE3 to NE1 is 200.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the maintenance domains of NE1, NE2, and NE3.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.
The New Maintenance Domain dialog box is displayed.
3. Configure the parameters of the new maintenance domains.
l Maintenance Domain Name: MD1 for NE1, NE2, and NE3
l Maintenance Domain Level: 4 for NE1, NE2, and NE3
NOTE
The maintenance domain names of the NEs can be different, but the maintenance domain levels
of the NEs must be the same.
Click in Relevant Service, and select relevant services in the New Maintenance
Association dialog box.
Step 4 Configure the remote MEPs for the maintenance associations of NE1, NE2, and NE3.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote MEP Point
dialog box is displayed.
4. Click New.
Then, the Add Maintenance Association Remote Maintenance Point dialog box is
displayed.
5. Set the parameters of the new remote MEPs.
l Remote Maintenance Point ID: 102 and 103 for NE1, and 101 for NE2 and NE3
NOTE
Set the Remote Maintenance Point ID of NE1 to the MP ID of NE2 and NE3, and set the
Remote Maintenance Point ID of NE2 and NE3 to the MP ID of NE1.
Step 5 Test the availability of the Ethernet services from NE1 to NE2 and NE3.
1. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of the NE1, and then choose
Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM.
2. Select the MD, MA, and MEP that correspond to Port 1, click OAM.
3. Select Start LB.
The LB Test window is displayed.
4. Select MP ID, and set the parameters in Test Node.
l Source Maintenance Point ID: 101 (maintenance point ID of NE1)
l Destination Maintenance Point ID: 102 (maintenance point ID of NE2)
l Transmitted Packet Count: 20 (recommended)
l Transmitted Packet Length: 64 (64 is a recommended value, and the parameter can
also be set to 128, 256, 512, 1024, and 1280 for testing the Ethernet services of different
packet lengths.)
NOTE
7. Repeat Step 5.4 to Step 5.6 to test the Ethernet services from NE1 to NE3.
l Source Maintenance Point ID: 101 (maintenance point ID of NE1)
l Destination Maintenance Point ID: 103 (maintenance point ID of NE3)
l Transmitted Packet Count: 20 (recommended)
l Transmitted Packet Length: 64 (recommended)
l Transmitted Packet Priority: 7 (recommended)
The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0.
----End
Prerequisite
l The E-LAN service must be created.
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 On the main interface, select the E-LAN service whose static MAC address entry needs to be
created.
Step 3 Click the Static MAC Address tab.
Step 4 Click New.
The New Static MAC Address dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Configure the parameters of the static MAC address entry.
Step 6 Click OK, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.9.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service
Prerequisite
l The E-LAN service must be created.
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 On the main interface, select the E-LAN service whose blacklist entry of MAC addresses needs
to be created.
Step 3 Click the Disabled MAC Address tab.
Step 4 Click New.
The Create Disabled MAC Address dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Configure the blacklist entry of MAC addresses.
Step 6 Click OK, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.9.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service
Prerequisite
l The E-LAN service must be created.
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 On the main interface, select the E-LAN service whose aging parameters of the MAC address
table need to be configured.
Step 4 Configure the status of the aging function and set the aging time.
Step 5 Click Apply, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.9.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service
Prerequisite
l The E-LAN service must be created.
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 On the main interface, select the E-LAN service whose dynamic MAC address needs to be
queried or cleared.
Step 4 Optional: Select the board whose dynamic MAC address needs to be queried and then check
the dynamic MAC addresses in the MAC address table that is displayed.
Step 5 Optional: Click Clear MAC Address to clear the dynamic MAC addresses. Then, click OK
in the dialog box that is displayed for confirmation.
----End
Related References
B.9.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service
Prerequisite
l The E-LAN service must be created.
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Step 2 On the main interface, select the E-LAN service, the mode for processing whose unknown frame
needs to be set.
Step 3 Click the Unknown Frame Processing tab.
Step 4 Set the mode for processing an unknown frame of the E-LAN service.
Step 5 Click Apply, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.9.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The Ethernet board must be added on the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the General Attributes tab.
Step 3 Configure the general attributes of Ethernet ports.
Step 4 Click Apply, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.9.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The Ethernet board must be added on the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Flow Control tab.
Step 3 Configure the traffic control of Ethernet ports.
Step 4 Click Apply, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.9.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The Ethernet board must be added on the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
Step 4 Click Apply, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.9.5.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The Ethernet board must be added on the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 4 Click Apply, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.9.5.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding IF board must be added to NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Basic Attributes tab.
Step 3 Set the general attributes of the IF_ETH port.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.11.13 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding IF board must be added to NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.11.14 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding IF board must be added to NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.11.15 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The boards where the member ports are located must be added in NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Click Create. The Create Port Group dialog box is displayed.
Then, the Create Port Group dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the member port from Available Port List. Then, click .
TIP
To select more than one port at a time, press and hold the Ctrl key or the Shift key when selecting
the ports.
4. Click OK.
----End
Related References
B.9.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The port group must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Bridge Parameters tab.
Step 3 Select the port group ID.
Step 4 Click the Bridge Parameters tab.
Step 5 Set the attributes of the bridge.
----End
Related References
B.9.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The port group must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.
Step 3 Select the port group from the drop-down list of Port Group.
----End
Related References
B.9.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The MSTP port group must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.9.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST
A.12.8.5 Changing the Spanning Tree Protocol Used by the Port Group
When the spanning tree protocol is upgraded (for example, from the STP protocol to the MSTP
protocol) for the equipment that runs the spanning tree together with the local NE, you need to
change the spanning tree protocol used by the port group on the local NE to be the same.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select the target protocol type from the Protocol Type drop-down list of the port group whose
spanning tree protocol needs to be changed.
----End
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
Step 3 Select Enabled or Disabled from the Enable Protocol drop-down list of the port group for
which the MSTP protocol needs to be enabled or disabled.
----End
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
Step 3 Click Configuration.
Then, the Configure Port Group dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Modify the configuration data of the MSTP port group.
Option Description
If ... Then ...
Option Description
A member port needs to be added 1. Select the board where the member ports are located
from the drop-down list of Board.
2. Select the port to be added from Available Port
List.
3. Click .
A member port needs to be deleted 1. Select the port to be deleted from Selected Port
List.
2. Click .
TIP
To select more than one port at a time, press and hold the Ctrl key or Shift key when selecting the ports.
----End
Related References
B.9.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration
This topic describes how to query the information about each multicast group in the IGMP
Snooping protocol.
A.12.9.4 Creating Static Router Ports
Static router ports are not aged.
A.12.9.5 Creating a Member of a Static Multicast Group
The members of a static multicast group are not aged.
A.12.9.6 Adding a Quickly Deleted Port
If an Ethernet port is connected to only one host, you can set this Ethernet port as a quickly
deleted port.
A.12.9.7 Calculating IGMP Packets
By calculating IGMP packets, you can be familiar with the information about the IGMP packets
received and transmitted through the IGMP Snooping protocol.
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The E-LAN service must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.9.2.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Protocol Configuration
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The E-LAN service must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.9.2.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Management
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The E-LAN service must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.9.2.12 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Member Port
Management
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The E-LAN service must be created.
l The NNI port must be configured for the E-LAN service.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
1. Select the static router port from the drop-down list of Available Port. Click .
TIP
To select more than one port at a time, press and hold the Ctrl key or the Shift key when selecting
the ports.
2. Click OK.
----End
Related References
B.9.2.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The E-LAN service must be created.
l The UNI port must be configured for the E-LAN service.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Select the member ports from the drop-down list of Available Port. Click .
TIP
To select more than one port at a time, press and hold the Ctrl key or Shift key when selecting the
ports.
3. Click OK.
----End
Related References
B.9.2.13 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Static Multicast Group
Member Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The E-LAN service must be created.
l The UNI port must be configured for the E-LAN service.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.9.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly
Deleted
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The E-LAN service must be created.
l The UNI port must be configured for the E-LAN service.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Packet Statistics tab.
Step 3 Click Query.
Step 4 Calculate the IGMP packets.
----End
Related References
B.9.2.14 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Data Statistics
This topic describes how to query the mapping relation between a port and a DS domain.
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The board of the Ethernet ports must be added on NE Panel.
Background Information
The OptiX RTN 910 has a default DS domain, whose Mapping Relation ID is 1 and Mapping
Relation Name is default map. Before another DS domain is created, all the ports belong to this
default DS domain. The default DS domain cannot be modified or deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.
Step 5 Configure the mapping relations between the priorities of ingress packets and PHB service
classes.
Step 7 Configure the mapping relations between the priorities of egress packets and PHB service
classes.
Step 8 Select Board where the application ports exist from Application Port.
----End
Related References
B.9.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The DS domain must be created.
Background Information
The OptiX RTN 910 has a default DS domain, whose Mapping Relation ID is 1 and Mapping
Relation Name is default map. Before another DS domain is created, all the ports belong to this
default DS domain. The default DS domain cannot be modified or deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the created DS domain and change its attributes on the main interface.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The DS domain must be created.
Background Information
The OptiX RTN 910 has a default DS domain, whose Mapping Relation ID is 1 and Mapping
Relation Name is default map. Before another DS domain is created, all the ports belong to this
default DS domain. The default DS domain cannot be modified or deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the DS domain for which you need to add or delete an application port on the main
interface.
Option Description
If ... Then ...
You need to add a port that uses the DS 1. Select the board where the application port is
domain located from the drop-down list of Board.
2. Select the port to be added from the drop-
down list of Available Port.
3. Click .
You need to delete a port that uses the DS 1. Select the board where the application port is
domain located from the drop-down list of Board.
2. Select the port to be deleted from the drop-
down list of Available Port.
3. Click .
You need to change the packet type Select a new packet type from the drop-down list
identified by the port of Packet Type.
TIP
To select more than one port at a time, press and hold the Ctrl key when selecting the ports.
----End
Related References
B.9.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The board of the Ethernet ports must be added on NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
4. Click OK.
----End
Related References
B.9.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The port policy must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select the port policy whose parameter values need to be changed.
Step 3 Double-click the parameters whose values need to be changed and change the queue scheduling,
weight, and queue shaping of the port queues.
Step 4 Click Apply.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The Ethernet board must be added on the NE Panel.
l The port policy must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab.
Step 3 Click New. The Create Traffic Classification dialog box is displayed.
The Create Traffic Classification dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Configure the attributes of a new traffic.
----End
Related References
B.9.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
3. Click OK.
To select more than one port at a time, press and hold the Ctrl key when selecting the ports.
2. Click OK.
----End
Related References
B.9.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The Ethernet board must be created on the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click New.
The New dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the parameters for the shaping of a port.
----End
Related References
B.9.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.9.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Background Information
The OptiX RTN 910 has a default DS domain, whose Mapping Relation ID is 1 and Mapping
Relation Name is default map. Before another DS domain is created, all the ports belong to this
default DS domain. The default DS domain cannot be modified or deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.
Step 4 Query the attributes of the DS domain and the mapping relation between the priority level of
the packets in the ingress direction and the PHB service class.
Step 7 Query the attributes of the DS domain and the mapping relation between the priority level of
the packets in the egress direction and the PHB service class.
----End
Related References
B.9.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management
After the continuity check (CC) test, the unidirectional link status can be checked automatically
and periodically. If the link is fault after the CC test is started at the source end, the sink equipment
reports the corresponding alarm.
A.12.11.7 Performing an LB Test
During a loopback (LB) test, you can check the bidirectional connectivity between the source
MEP and any MEP in the same maintenance association (MA).
A.12.11.8 Performing an LT Test
Based on the LB test, the link trace (LT) test further improves the capability to locate faults.
That is, the faulty network segment can be located according to the MIP through only one test.
A.12.11.1 Creating an MD
A maintenance domain (MD) defines the range and level of the Ethernet OAM. MDs of different
ranges and levels can provide users with differentiated OAM services.
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding board must be added on the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
Step 5 Click OK, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.9.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain
Creation
A.12.11.2 Creating an MA
An MD can be divided into several independent maintenance associations (MAs). By creating
MAs, you can associate specific Ethernet services with MAs. This facilitates Ethernet OAM
operations.
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The MD must be created.
l The Ethernet service must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Maintenance Association tab.
Step 3 Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created. Choose
New > New Maintenance Association.
The system displays the New Maintenance Association dialog box.
Step 4 Set the parameters of the MA.
NOTE
Click in Relevant Service. Select the corresponding services in the Select Service dialog box
that is displayed.
Step 5 Click OK, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.9.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association
Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The MA must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New > New
MEP Point.
The system displays the New MEP Point dialog box.
Step 5 Click OK, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.9.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The MA must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote MEP Point dialog
box is displayed.
Step 6 Click OK, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.9.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The MA must be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.
Then, the New MIP Maintenance Point dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the parameters of the new MIP.
Step 5 Click OK. Then, close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.9.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The MEP must be created.
l The remote MEPs must be created.
Background Information
l Only the MEP can enable the CC test and function as the receiving and responding end in
the test.
l During the CC check, the source MEP constructs and transmits continuity check message
(CCM) packets periodically. After receiving the CCM packets from the source MEP, the
sink MEP directly enables the CC function for this source MEP. If the sink MEP fails to
receive the CCM packets from the source MEP within the check period (that is, 3.5 times
of the transmit period), it reports the alarm automatically.
l Performing a CC test does not affect the services.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Maintenance Association tab.
Step 3 Select the MEP where you need to perform the CC test and then choose OAM > Activate
CC.
Then, a dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
NOTE
l Before the CC test, you can set CC Test Transmit Period according to the actual requirements.
l To disable a CC test, select the MEP where the CC test is performed and then choose OAM >
Deactivate.
TIP
l Alternatively, you can enable a CC test by right-clicking an MEP and then choosing Activate CC from
the shortcut menu.
l Alternatively, you can disable a CC test by right-clicking an MEP and then choosing Deactivate CC
from the shortcut menu.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The source and sink MEPs in the same maintenance domain must be created.
l The remote MEPs must be created.
l The CC function must be enabled.
Background Information
l Only MEPs can initiate the LB test and function as the receive end in the test.
l During the LB test, the source MEP constructs and transmits the LBM frames and starts
the timer. If the sink MP receives the LBM frames, it sends the LBR frames back to the
source MEP. This indicates that the loopback is successful. If the source MEP timer times
out, it indicates that the loopback fails.
l Performing a LB test does not affect the services.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test.
To enable a LB test, you can also right-click an MEP and then choose Start LB from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Select the method for identifying the destination MP and set the parameters involved in the LB
test.
NOTE
Step 6 Click Start Test. Then, the LB test result is displayed in the Detection Result window.
----End
Related References
B.9.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The source and sink MEPs in the same MD must be created.
l The remote MEPs must be created.
l The CC function must be enabled.
Background Information
l Only MEPs can initiate the LT test and work as the termination point in the test.
l During the LT test, the source MEP constructs and transmits the LTM frames and starts
the timer. All the MPs that receive the LTM frames send the LTR frame response.
According to the LTR frame response, you can verify all the MIPs that pass from the source
MEP to the sink MEP.
l Performing a LT test does not affect the services.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Maintenance Association tab.
Step 3 Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test.
Step 4 Choose OAM > Start LT.
Then, the LT Test dialog box is displayed.
TIP
To enable a LT test, you can also right-click an MEP and then choose Start LT from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Select the method for identifying the destination MP and set the parameters involved in the LT
test.
NOTE
Step 6 Click Start Test. Then, the LT test result is displayed in the Detection Result window.
----End
Related References
B.9.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Background Information
The OAM auto-discovery is realized through the auto-negotiation between the local equipment
and the opposite equipment. If the negotiation fails, the local equipment reports an alarm. After
the OAM auto-discovery succeeds, the link performance is monitored according to the error
frame threshold. You can set the error frame threshold on the NMS.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
l The OAM mode includes the active mode and the passive mode. For two interconnected systems, the
OAM mode of either or both systems must be the active mode. Otherwise, the OAM auto-discovery
fails.
l If the OAM modes of the two systems are both passive modes, a fault occurs on the line, or one system
fails to receive the OAM protocol message, an alarm is reported, indicating that the OAM auto-
discovery fails.
Step 5 Click Apply, and then close the displayed prompt dialog box.
Step 6 Click the Remote OAM Parameter tab. Click Query to obtain the OAM capability of the
opposite end, and then close the displayed prompt dialog box.
----End
Related References
B.9.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The OAM auto-discovery operation must successful on the equipment at both ends.
Background Information
After the OAM auto-discovery operation is successful at both ends, the link fault detection and
performance detection are automatically started.
l To report the detected link fault event to the opposite equipment, you need to set Link
Event Notification to Enabled for the local equipment.
l To report the detected link fault event to the opposite equipment, you need to set Link
Event Notification to Enabled and set Error Frame Period Window (ms) and Error
Frame Monitor Threshold (frame) for the local equipment.
l After Link Event Notification is set to Enabled at the opposite port, if the opposite end
detects link performance degradation, you can query the ETH_EFM_EVENT alarm, which
is reported on the local end, by using the NMS. According to the alarm, you can determine
the type of the link performance event.
l After Link Event Notification is set to Enabled at the opposite port, if the opposite
equipment detects a link fault event, you can query the ETH_EFM_REMFAULT alarm,
which is reported at the local end, by using the NMS. According to the alarm, you can
determine the fault type.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select the corresponding port and set Link Event Notification to Enabled.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.9.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The IEEE 802.3ah OAM function must be enabled on the remote equipment and the OAM
auto-discovery operation must be successful on the equipment at both ends.
Background Information
After the OAM auto-discovery operation is successful, the remote link event notification
function is enabled and the monitoring time and errored frame threshold are set at the local end.
If the local equipment detects a link event in the receive direction, it informs the opposite
equipment of the link event. If the remote alarm for the link event is also supported at the opposite
end, the opposite equipment can also inform the local equipment of the link event that is detected
at the opposite end. Then, the corresponding alarm is reported at the local end.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Select the port and set the parameters in the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab page.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.9.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame
Monitoring
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The OAM auto-discovery operation must be successful at both ends of the link.
l On the equipment that initiates the loopback, OAM Working Mode must be set to
Active.
l The equipment that responds to the loopback must support the remote loopback.
Background Information
l If a port is capable of responding to loopbacks, it enters the loopback responding state and
reports the loopback responding alarm after receiving the command of enabling the remote
loopback function sent from the opposite OAM port. In this case, the equipment that
initiates the loopback enters the loopback initiating state and reports the loopback initiating
alarm.
l Generally, after the remote loopback function is enabled, service packets, except the
OAMPDU, are looped back at the remote end.
l After using the remote loopback function to complete the fault locating and the link
performance detection, you need to disable the remote loopback function at the end where
the loopback is initiated and then restore the services. At this time, the alarm is automatically
cleared.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, close the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 5 Choose Enable Remote Loopback from the drop-down menu of OAM. Then, close the dialog
box that is displayed.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The required board is already added on the NE Panel.
l All the external physical ports on the Ethernet service processing board must be enabled.
Background Information
After the loopback detection is enabled at an Ethernet port, the ETHOAM_SELF_LOOP alarm
is reported if a loopback occurs at the port.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Step 3 Set Loopback Check to Enabled.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding board must be added to the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT
Management from the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.9.2.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding board must be added in the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Statistics Group tab.
Step 3 Set the required parameters for the statistics group.
If you click Start, the register of the statistics group is not reset to clear the existing data.
----End
Related References
B.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding boards must be added in the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the RMON Setting tab.
Step 3 Click the Object tab and set the corresponding parameters.
Step 4 Click the Event tab and set the corresponding parameters.
Step 5 Click Apply. Then, close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding boards must be added in the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History
Control Group.
Step 3 Click Apply. Then, close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding boards must be added in the NE Panel.
l The objects and performance events to be monitored must be set.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the
NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.
Step 3 Configure Transmit Frequency(MHz) and T/R Spacing(MHz) of the ODU.
----End
Related References
B.11.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the
NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.11.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The related IF board must be added.
l The corresponding board must be added on the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Power Attributes tab.
Step 3 Configure the power attribute parameters of the ODU.
Related References
B.11.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added on the
NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Step 3 Configure the parameters of the ODU, such as Configure Transmission Status.
Related References
B.11.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes
transmitter is in the mute state, the ODU transmitter does not work, but the ODU can receive
microwave signals.
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding IF boards and the ODUs connected to the IF boards must be added to
the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Step 3 Set Configure Transmission Status for the ODU.
----End
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding board must be added on the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.
Step 3 Set the parameters of SDH ports.
1. Choose Port from the drop-down list, and then configure the parameters of SDH ports.
Click Apply.
----End
Related References
B.11.10 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding board must be added on the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 5 Click Apply, and then close the dialog box that is displayed indicating the operation result.
----End
Related References
B.11.12 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding board must be added on the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead
Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Configure the J0 byte.
1. Double-click the parameter whose value needs to be changed.
The Please input the overhead byte dialog box is displayed.
2. Configure overhead bytes.
3. Click OK.
Step 3 Click Apply.
A dialog box is displayed for confirmation.
Step 4 Click OK, and then close the dialog box that is displayed indicating the operation result.
----End
Related References
B.12.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding board must be added on the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Step 3 Optional: Configure the J1 byte.
1. Click the Trace Byte J1 tab.
2. Double-click the parameter whose value needs to be changed.
The Please Input Overhead Byte dialog box is displayed.
3. Configure overhead bytes.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Apply.
A dialog box is displayed for confirmation.
6. Click OK, and then close the dialog box that is displayed indicating the operation result.
3. Click Apply.
A dialog box is displayed for confirmation.
4. Click OK. Close the dialog box that is displayed indicating the operation result.
3. Click Apply.
A dialog box is displayed for confirmation.
4. Click OK, and then close the dialog box that is displayed indicating the operation result.
----End
Related References
B.12.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The corresponding board must be added on the NE Panel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Apply.
A dialog box is displayed for confirmation.
6. Click OK, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 3 Configure the signal flag.
1. Click the Signal Flag tab.
2. Configure the signal flag in the V5 byte.
3. Click Apply.
A dialog box is displayed for confirmation.
4. Click OK, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.12.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
The OptiX RTN 910 supports the transmission of a channel of 64-kbit/s synchronous data service
through a user-defined byte in the microwave frame or the F1 overhead byte in the STM-N
frame. Such a service is also called F1 data port service.
A.18.3 Configuring the Asynchronous Data Service
The OptiX RTN 910 supports the transmission of a channel of asynchronous data service with
a maximum rate of 64 kbit/s through a user-defined byte in the microwave frame or any byte
within the range of SERIAL1-SERIAL4 in the STM-N frame. Such a service is also called
broadcast data port service.
A.18.4 Configuring the Wayside E1 Service
The OptiX RTN 910 supports the transmission of a channel of 2.048-Mbit/s wayside E1 service
through 32 user-defined bytes in the SDH microwave frame.
A.18.5 Configure External Alarms
After the outputting of external alarms is configured, the alarm information of the OptiX RTN
910 can be output to other equipment. After the inputting of external alarms is configured, the
alarm information of other equipment can be input to the OptiX RTN 910.
Prerequisite
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire
from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the General tab.
Step 3 Configure the orderwire information.
3. Click Apply.
----End
Related References
B.10.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
B.10.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The board involved in the synchronous data service must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire
from the Function Tree.
Step 3 Hold on the Ctrl key, select two data channels from Available Data Channel, and then click
----End
Related References
B.10.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The board involved in the asynchronous data service must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwire
from the Function Tree.
----End
Related References
B.10.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The IF1 board must be added on the NE Panel.
l The DCC channels corresponding to external clocks must be disabled.
Background Information
The wayside E1 service can be supported by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM,
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz,16QAM mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Click the IF Attributes tab.
Step 3 Configure the enable status of the wayside E1 service and set the slot that houses the board.
----End
Related References
B.11.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
Prerequisite
l You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.
l The AUX board must be added on the NE Panel.
Context
The external alarms of the OptiX RTN 910 are also considered as housekeeping alarms. The
external alarm port of the OptiX RTN 910 is a relay port. This port can be either in the "on" state
or in the "off" state.
The OptiX RTN 910 provides one alarm output port and three alarm input ports. The alarm input
ports report the RELAY_ALARM alarm (the alarm parameter indicates the port number of the
input alarm) after the external alarm is triggered. To ensure that the external alarm port works
normally, the external alarm cables must be correctly connected.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the AUX logical board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface
from the Function Tree.
Step 2 Configure the input alarm.
1. Select Input Relay from the drop-down list.
2. Configure the parameters of the input alarm.
3. Click Apply, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
Step 3 Configure the output alarm.
1. Select Output Relay from the drop-down list.
2. Configure the parameters of the output alarm.
3. Click Apply, and then close the dialog box that is displayed.
----End
Related References
B.10.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
Prerequisite
l Aligning the antennas is complete.
l The equipment is configured with the IF 1+1 protection.
l The E1 service is configured.
NE A NE B
As shown in Figure A-2, the following procedures consider the E1 service between NE A and
NE B that is configured with the 1+1 HSB protection as an example.
NOTE
l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to HSB, TX Status should be set to mute for the ODU on
the main channel of NE A, and Enable Reverse Switching should be set to Disable. The switching occurs
at NE A.
l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to SD, TX Status should be set to mute for the ODU on
the main channel of NE A, and Enable Reverse Switching should be set to Enable. The switching occurs
at NE A.
l If Working Mode of the IF 1+1 protection is set to FD, TX Status should be set to mute for the ODU on
the main channel of NE B. The switching occurs at NE A.
Precautions
NOTE
If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of Active Board of Device or Active Board
of Channel in Protection Group when the protection switching occurs and after the protection switching is
complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site.
If... Then...
A BER tester is available on site Perform Step 2 to Step 11.
No BER tester is available on site Perform Step 6 to Step 10.
Step 2 At the central site NE A, connect one E1 port to the BER tester.
Step 3 At the remote site NE B, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.
1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.
Step 5 Set Enable Reverse Switching in the 1+1 HSB protection group for NE A.
1. Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose
Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
2. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and set Enable Reverse
Switching to Enable.
3. Click Apply.
Step 6 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose
Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
2. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and then click Query.
3. In Protection Group, the value of Active Board of Device should be the main IF board
3-IFU2.
If... Then...
A BER tester is available on site Check the test result on the BER tester. It
should show that the service is restored after a
transient interruption.
No BER tester is available on site, and the See A.10.10 Testing the E1 Service Through
E1 service is transmitted on the radio link. PRBS to test the availability of the E1 service.
No BER tester is available on site, and the See A.12.3.8 Testing the Ethernet Service to
Ethernet service is transmitted on the radio test the availability of the Ethernet service.
link.
Step 9 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose
Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.
2. Select the corresponding protection group in Protection Group, and then click Query.
3. In Protection Group, the value of Active Board of Device should be the standby IF board
4-IFU2.
----End
Prerequisite
l Aligning the antennas must be complete.
l The equipment must be configured with the N+1 protection.
NE A NE B
As shown in Figure A-3, the following procedures consider the E1 service between NE A and
NE B that is configured with the N+1 (N=1) protection as an example.
Precautions
NOTE
If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of Switching Status in Slot Mapping
Relation when the protection switching occurs and after the protection switching is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site.
If... Then...
A BER tester is available on site Perform Step 2 to Step 10.
No BER tester is available on site Perform Step 5 to Step 9.
Step 2 At the central site NE A, connect one E1 port to the BER tester.
Step 3 At the remote site NE B, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.
1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.
Step 5 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE B.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE B, and then choose
Configuration > N+1 protection from the Function Tree.
2. Select the ID of the protection group to be queried, and then click Query.
3. In Slot Mapping Relation, Switching Status of the working unit 3-IFU2-1 and the
protection unit 4-IFU2-1 should be Normal.
NOTE
If a fault arises, you must rectify the fault and then proceed with the N+1 protection testing.
If... Then...
A BER tester is available on site Check the test result on the BER tester. It
should show that the service is restored after a
transient interruption.
No BER tester is available on site, and the See A.10.10 Testing the E1 Service Through
E1 service is transmitted on the radio link. PRBS to test the availability of the E1 service.
No BER tester is available on site, and the See A.12.3.8 Testing the Ethernet Service to
Ethernet service is transmitted on the radio test the availability of the Ethernet service.
link.
Step 8 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE B.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE B, and then choose
Configuration > N+1 protection from the Function Tree.
2. Select the ID of the protection group to be queried, and then click Query.
3. In Slot Mapping Relation, the Switching Status of the working unit 3-IFU2-1 for the
service that is configured with the N+1 protection should be SF.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.
----End
Prerequisite
l Aligning the antennas must be complete.
l The equipment must be configured with the SNCP.
NE A
Working
Protecting SNC SNC
NE D
NE B
NE C
Precautions
NOTE
If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of Active Channel in Working Service when
the protection switching occurs and after the protection switching is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site.
If... Then...
A BER tester is available on site Perform Step 2 to Step 10.
No BER tester is available on site Perform Step 5 to Step 9.
Step 2 At the central site NE A, connect one E1 port to the BER tester.
Step 3 At the remote site NE C, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.
1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
If... Then...
A BER tester is available on site Check the test result on the BER tester. It
should show that the service is restored after a
transient interruption.
No BER tester is available on site, and the See A.10.10 Testing the E1 Service Through
E1 service is transmitted on the radio link. PRBS to test the availability of the E1 service.
Step 8 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE C.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE C, and then choose
Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree.
2. Click Function, and then select Query Switching Status.
3. The current SNCP status of the equipment is displayed in Working Service and Protection
Service.
In Current Status, the service switching mode is displayed. In Active Channel,
Protection Channel should be displayed.
----End
Prerequisite
l The equipment must be configured with the ERPS.
l The network cable for carrying the working and protection Ethernet services of the ERPS
must be properly connected.
East West
NE B
Protection channel East
West
NE A NE D
East
West
Working channel
NE C
West
East
Procedure
Step 1 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE D.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE D, and then choose
Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
2. Select the ERPS protection group to be queried, and then click Query.
3. The value of Status of State Machine should be Idle.
Step 2 See A.12.3.8 Testing the Ethernet Service to test the availability of the Ethernet service.
The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0.
Step 3 Set TX Status to mute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose
Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3. Select the required ODU, and set TX Status to mute.
4. Click Apply.
Step 4 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE D.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE D, and then choose
Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
2. Select the ERPS protection group to be queried, and then click Query.
3. The value of Status of State Machine should be Protection.
Step 5 See A.12.3.8 Testing the Ethernet Service to test the availability of the Ethernet service.
The LossRate in the Detection Result should be 0.
Step 6 Set TX Status to unmute for the west ODU 23-ODU of NE A.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose
Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
3. Select the required ODU, and set TX Status to Unmute.
4. Click Apply.
----End
Prerequisite
l The equipment must be configured with the linear MSP.
l The working and protection optical fibers of the linear MSP are connected properly.
NE A Working channel NE B
Protection channel
Precautions
NOTE
If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of West Switching Status in Slot Mapping
Relation when the protection switching occurs and after the protection switching is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site.
If... Then...
A BER tester is available on site Perform Step 2 to Step 10.
No BER tester is available on site Perform Step 5 to Step 9.
Step 2 At the central site NE A, connect one E1 port to the BER tester.
Step 3 At the remote site NE B, perform a software inloop at the corresponding E1 port by using the
NMS.
1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.
2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.
3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.
4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.
Step 4 Test the BER by using the BER tester. The BER tester should show that no bit errors occur.
If bit errors occur, see the Maintenance Guide for handling the bit errors.
Step 5 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose
Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree.
2. In Slot Mapping Relation, select Working Unit.
3. Click Query, and then select Query Switching Status.
In Slot Mapping Relation, the value of West Switching Status should be Idle.
NOTE
In the case of the working and protection units of the service that is configured with the linear MSP, the
values of West Switching Status should be Idle. If a fault arises, you must rectify the fault and proceed
with the linear MSP switching testing.
If... Then...
The BER tester is available on site Check the test result on the BER tester. It
should show that the service is restored after a
transient interruption.
If... Then...
No BER tester is available on site, and the See A.10.10 Testing the E1 Service Through
E1 service is transmitted on the optical fiber PRBS to test the availability of the E1 service.
link.
Step 8 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose
Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree.
2. In Slot Mapping Relation, select Working Unit.
3. Click Query, and then select Query Switching Status.
In Slot Mapping Relation, the value of West Switching Status should be Switch upon
signal failure.
NOTE
In the case of the 1+1 linear MSP, Revertive Mode can be set to Revertive or Non-Revertive. In the case
of the 1:N linear MSP, Revertive Mode is always set to Revertive.
l After the automatic switching occurs on the equipment, the service is restored. If Revertive Mode is
set to Revertive for the linear MSP, the change in values of West Switching Status and Protected
Unit can be queried after the WTR time expires.
l After the automatic switching occurs on the equipment, the service is restored. If Revertive Mode is
set to Non-Revertive for the linear MSP, stop and then start the MSP protocol to restore the value of
West Switching Status to Idle.
5. Click Apply.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
6. Click OK.
The Confirm dialog box is displayed.
7. Click OK.
The Operation Result dialog box is displayed.
8. Click Close.
----End
Prerequisite
l Aligning the antennas must be complete.
l The radio links must be Hybrid radio links for which the AM function is enabled.
l The E1 service must be configured.
l The weather is favorable.
Precautions
The following test procedure considers the E1 service between NEs as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the BER tester to an E1 port on the local NE.
NOTE
Test the E1 services with the highest priority, which are not discarded in the lowest-order modulation mode.
Step 2 On the remote NE, perform an inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.
NOTE
In the case of unfavorable weather, the current modulation mode may be lower than the value of
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity.
----End
Prerequisite
l Aligning the antennas must be complete.
l The radio links must be Hybrid radio links for which the AM function is enabled.
l The weather is favorable.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute on the local NE.
1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/AM
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Disable, and set Manually Specified Modulation
Mode to the same value as Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
3. Click Apply.
Step 2 Query the 15-minute performance value of the IF board on the local NE.
1. Select the required IF board from the Object Tree in NE Explorer.
NOTE
In the case of unfavorable weather, the current modulation mode may be lower than the value of
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity.
----End
B Parameters Description
Navigation Path
Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.
Address Type IP Address of GNE IP Address Range of GNE l If the OSI protocol is
NSAP Address used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
IP Address Range of GNE based on NSAP
Address only.
l If the IP protocol is
used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on IP Address of
GNE or IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To search for all the
NEs that communicate
with the gateway NE,
select IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To select the gateway
NE only, select IP
Address of GNE.
NOTE
If Address Type is set to IP
Address of GNE or IP
Address Range of GNE,
and if the U2000 (server)
and the gateway NE are
located in different network
segments, ensure that the
U2000 and relevant routers
are configured with the IP
routes for the network
segment in which the
U2000 and gateway NE are
located.
If Address Type is set to
NSAP Address, ensure that
the OSI protocol stack is
installed.
Related Tasks
A.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method
Navigation Path
1. In the Physical View, right-click New > NE.
2. Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 910 from the Object Tree.
Related Tasks
A.1.2 Creating NEs by Using the Manual Method
Navigation Path
1. In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be modified.
2. Choose Object Attributes.
3. Click Modify NE ID.
Related Tasks
A.1.4 Changing the NE ID
Navigation Path
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from
the Main Menu.
2. Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.
Related Tasks
A.1.6 Synchronizing the NE Time
Navigation Path
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Localization
Management from the Main Menu.
2. Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click
Related Tasks
A.1.7 Localizing the NE Time
Navigation Path
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from
the Main Menu.
2. Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.
Related Tasks
A.1.8 Configuring Standard NTP Keys
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > License
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the License Management tab.
Navigation Path
1. On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic
Disabling of NE Function.
2. Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and
then click .
NE Type OptiX RTN 910 - This parameter indicates the type of the NE.
Navigation Path
1. Choose File > Discovery > Fiber from the Main Menu.
2. Select the board of the NE on which the fiber needs to be searched for or the IF board of
the NE on which radio links need to be searched for from the Subject Tree.
3. Click Search.
Related Tasks
A.4.1 Creating an Optical Transmission Line or Radio Link by Using the Search Method
Navigation Path
1. Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Add Object dialog box is
displayed.
2. Choose Link > Fiber from the Object Tree.
Related Tasks
A.4.3 Creating an SDH Optical Transmission Link by Using the Manual Method
Navigation Path
1. Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Add Object dialog box is
displayed.
2. Choose Link > Microwave Link from the Object Tree.
Related Tasks
A.4.2 Creating a Radio Link by Using the Manual Method
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
Related Tasks
A.6.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.
Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled (for line It is recommended that you use the default
Disabled ports) value, except for the following cases:
Disabled (for l If the port is connected to the other ECC
external clock subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set to
interfaces) Disabled.
l If the port is connected to a third-party
network and does not exchange the
network management information with
other ports, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
l If external clock interfaces are used to
transmit the DCC solution, Enabled/
Disabled is set to Enabled for the
external clock interfaces.
Channel Type D1-D3 D1-D1 (for the PDH It is recommended that you use the default
D4-D12 radio whose value, except for the following cases:
transmission l If the IP over DCC or OSI over DCC
D1-D12 capacity is less than solution is adopted, Channel Type for
D1-D1 16xE1) the SDH line ports is set to a value that is
D1-D3 (for other the same as the value for third-party
cases) network.
l If the DCC transparent transmission
solution is adopted, the value of Channel
Type for the SDH line ports should not
conflict with the value that is set for the
third-party network.
Protocol Type HWECC HWECC It is recommended that you use the default
TCP/IP value, except for the following cases:
OSI l If the IP over DCC solution is adopted,
Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.
l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted,
Protocol Type is set to OSI.
Related Tasks
A.6.2 Configuring DCCs
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab.
3. Click Create.
NOTE
a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functions
the same regardless of the source port or sink port.
Related Tasks
A.6.4 Configuring DCC Transparent Transmission
Navigation Path
Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the
Function Tree.
ECC Extended Automatically Automatically It is recommended that you use the default
Mode Assign Assign value.
Specified mode
Related Tasks
A.6.3 Configuring the Extended ECC
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC
Link Management from the Function Tree.
Related Tasks
A.6.13 Querying ECC Routes
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IP Route Management tab.
Related Tasks
A.6.14 Querying IP Routes
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IP Route Management tab.
3. Click New.
Related Tasks
A.6.5 Creating Static IP Routes
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
OSPF Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
DCC Hello Timer 1 to 255 1 l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the Hello
(s) packet timer at the DCC interface.
l The Hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that is
connected to the router. By periodically
transmitting the hello packets, you can
determine whether the interface on the
neighbor router is still in the active status.
l DCC Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer to
transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
DCC Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.
LAN Hello Timer 1 to 255 1 l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hello
(s) packet timer at the LAN interfaces.
l The hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that is
connected to the router. By periodically
transmitting the hello packets, you can
determine whether the interface on the
neighbor router is still in the active status.
l LAN Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer of the
NE to transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.
Related Tasks
A.6.6 Setting Parameters of the OSPF Protocol
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Proxy ARP tab.
Proxy ARP Disabled Disabled l The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the
Enabled same network segment but different
domains to communicate with each other.
l To realize communication between such
NEs, the source NE sends the ARP
broadcast packet to address the route to
the destination NE. The NE with the
proxy ARP function enabled checks the
routing table after sensing the ARP
broadcast packet. If the routing table
contains the destination address that the
ARP broadcast packet looks for, the NE
returns an ARP spoofing packet, which
enables the NE that sends the ARP
broadcast packet to consider that the
MAC address of the NE that returns the
ARP spoofing packet is the MAC address
of the destination NE. In this manner, the
packet that is to be sent to the destination
NE is first sent to the NE with the proxy
ARP function enabled and then
forwarded to the destination NE.
Related Tasks
A.6.7 Enabling the ARP Proxy
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.
Related Tasks
A.6.8 Configuring the CLNS Role
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Routing Table tab.
Related Tasks
A.6.15 Querying OSI Routes
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OSI Tunnel tab.
LAPD Actor User User l This parameter specifies the LAPD actor.
Network l If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol,
they can perform the LAPD negotiation
only when the LAPD actor is set to
User at one end and is set to Network at
the other end.
LAPD Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.6.9 Configuring the OSI Tunnel
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Bandwidth Management tab.
Tunnel Bandwidth - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
(kbps) parameter.
IF Port Bandwidth - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
(kbps) parameter.
Related Tasks
A.6.10 Configuring the VLAN ID and Bandwidth Used by an Inband DCN
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port Settings tab.
Related Tasks
A.6.11 Configuring the Enable Status of the Inband DCN Function on Ports
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Protocol Settings tab.
Related Tasks
A.6.12 Configuring the Protocol Type of the Inband DCN
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Access
Control from the Function Tree.
The First Network Enabled Enabled After The First Network Port is set to
Port Disabled Enabled for Ethernet access, the NE can
access the NMS through the Ethernet port.
Enable Serial Port Selected Selected After Enable Serial Port Access is
Access Deselected selected, the NE can access the NMS or
command lines through the serial port.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT Access
Control from the Function Tree.
LCT Access Access Allowed Access Allowed l No NMS user logs in to the NE. In this
Control Switch Disable Access case, when the LCT requests an LCT user
to log in to the NE, the NE does not check
the status of LCT Access Control
Switch, and directly allows the LCT user
to log in to the NE.
l An NMS user first logs in to the NE. In
this case, when the LCT requests an LCT
user to log in to the NE, the NE
determines whether to allow the LCT
user to log in to the NE through the LCT
according to the status of LCT Access
Control Switch.
l An LCT user first logs in to the NE. In
this case, when the NMS requests an
NMS user to log in to the NE, the NMS
user can directly log in to the NE. After
the NMS user successfully logs in to the
NE, the online LCT user is not affected.
l When both the LCT user and NMS user
log in to the NE, the online LCT user is
not affected after LCT Access Control
Switch is set to Disable Access.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the XPIC tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
ATPC Upper -75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l The central value between the ATPC
Threshold(dBm) upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold is set as the expected receive
ATPC Lower -35.0 to -90.0 -70.0 power.
Threshold(dBm)
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic Threshold
Enable Status is set to Disabled.
Related Tasks
A.8.2 Creating an XPIC Protection Group
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the XPIC tab.
Power to Be -90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l This parameter is used to set the expected
Received -V(dBm) receive power of the ODU and is mainly
used in the antenna alignment stage.
After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU exceeds
the range of receive power±3 dB, the
ODU LED of the IF board connected to
the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and
off for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating that
the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l When this parameter takes the default
value, the antenna misalignment
indicating function is disabled.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Power to Be -90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l This parameter is used to set the expected
Received -H(dBm) receive power of the ODU and is mainly
used in the antenna alignment stage.
After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU exceeds
the range of receive power±3 dB, the
ODU LED of the IF board connected to
the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and
off for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating that
the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l When this parameter takes the default
value, the antenna misalignment
indicating function is disabled.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
ATPC Upper -75.0 to -20.0 - l Set the central value between the ATPC
Threshold(dBm) upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold to a value for the expected
ATPC Lower -35.0 to -90.0 - receive power.
Threshold(dBm)
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) o the difference
between the planned central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.
l You can set this parameter only when
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Disabled.
Related Tasks
A.8.3 Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes of the XPIC Hybrid Radio Link
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.
WTR time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-
restore (WTR) time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Select Mapping Work Unit Work Unit l This parameter specifies the mapping
Direction Protection Unit direction of N+1 protection.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Related Tasks
A.8.8 Creating an N+1 Protection Group
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
Related Tasks
A.8.13 Querying the IF N+1 Protection Status
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Revertive Mode Revertive Mode Revertive Mode l This parameter specifies the revertive
Non-Revertive mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
Mode l When this parameter is set to Revertive
Mode, the NE that is in the switching
state releases the switching and enables
the former working channel to return to
the normal state some time after the
former working channel is restored to
normal.
l When this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive Mode.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-
restore (WTR) time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse
Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
Related Tasks
A.8.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Enable Reverse Switching, Revertive Mode, and WTR Time
(s) must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
Related Tasks
A.8.12 Querying the IF 1+1 Protection Status
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
ATPC Upper -75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l This parameter specifies the central value
Threshold(dBm) between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold to a value for
the expected receive power.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Enable IEEE-1588 Enabled Disabled If the OptiX RTN 910 is interconnected with
Timeslot Disabled the packet radio equipment, this parameter
is set to Enabled. Otherwise, this parameter
is set to Disabled.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Power to Be -90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l This parameter is used to set the expected
Received(dBm) receive power of the ODU and is mainly
used in the antenna alignment stage. After
this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU exceeds
the range of receive power±3 dB, the
ODU LED of the IF board connected to
the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and
off for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating that
the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l When this parameter takes the default
value, the antenna misalignment
indicating function is disabled.
l This parameter needs to be according to
the planning.
Equipment Information
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.8.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear
MS from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.
Protection Type 1+1 Protection 1+1 Protection l This parameter specifies the protection
1:N Protection type of the linear MSP group.
l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one
working channel and one protection
channel are required. When the working
channel fails, the service is switched from
the working channel to the protection
channel.
l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working
channels and one protection channel are
required. Normal services are transmitted
on the working channels and extra
services are transmitted on the protection
channel. When one working channel
fails, the services are switched from this
working channel to the protection
channel, and the extra services are
interrupted.
l If extra services need to be transmitted or
several working channels are required,
select 1:N Protection.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Non-Revertive (1+1 l This parameter specifies the revertive
Revertive Protection) mode of the linear MSP.
Revertive (1:N l When this parameter is set to Revertive,
Protection) the NE that is in the switching state
releases the switching and enables the
former working channel to return to the
normal state some time after the former
working channel is restored to normal.
l When this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive, the NE that is in the switching
state keeps the current state unchanged
unless another switching occurs even
though the former working channel is
restored to normal.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive.
l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N
Protection, Revertive Mode can be set
to Revertive only.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the WTR time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Protocol Type New Protocol New Protocol l The new protocol is supported at the early
Restructure Protocol stage, and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
l The restructure protocol optimizes the
new protocol and provides better
measures to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new protocol runs
in a better manner.
l The new protocol is more mature, and the
restructure protocol complies with the
standard. It is recommended that you use
the new protocol.
l You must ensure that the interconnected
NEs run the protocols of the same type.
Select Mapping West Working Unit West Working Unit This parameter specifies the mapping
Direction West Protection direction of the linear MSP.
Unit
Related Tasks
A.9.1 Configuring Linear MSP
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS
from the Function Tree.
Protocol Type New Protocol - l The new protocol is supported at the early
Restructure Protocol stage, and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
l The restructure protocol optimizes the
new protocol and provides better
measures to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new protocol runs
in a better manner.
l You must ensure that the interconnected
NEs run the protocols of the same type.
l The new protocol is more mature, and the
restructure protocol complies with the
standard. It is recommended that you use
the new protocol.
Related Tasks
A.9.2 Querying the Status of the Linear MSP
Navigation Path
l Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
l Click Create.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.10.1 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services
Navigation Path
l Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
l Click Create SNCP Service.
Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of the
service to be created is SNCP.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the WTR time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Related Tasks
A.10.2 Creating Cross-Connections of SNCP Services
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of the
service to be created is SNCP.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the WTR time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Related Tasks
A.10.5 Converting a Normal Service into an SNCP Service
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Cross-Connection Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Bound Group - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
Number parameter.
Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Related Tasks
A.10.7 Querying TDM Services
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service
Control from the Function Tree.
Service Grouping - - The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this
parameter.
Related Tasks
A.10.3 Configuring the Automatic Switching of SNCP Services
A.10.9 Querying the Protection Status of SNCP Services
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Source Priority.
2. Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.11.1 Configuring the Clock Sources
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Subnet Configuration.
2. Click the Clock Subnet tab.
Protection Status Start Extended SSM Stop SSM Protocol l The SSM protocol is a
Protocol scheme used for
Start Standard SSM synchronous
Protocol management on an
SDH network and
Stop SSM Protocol indicates that the SSM
is passed by the lower
four bits of the S1 byte
and can be exchanged
between the nodes. The
SSM protocol ensures
that the equipment
automatically selects
the clock source of the
highest quality and
highest priority, thus
preventing mutual
clock tracing.
l After the standard SSM
protocol is started, the
NE first performs the
protection switching on
the clock source
according to the clock
quality level
information provided
by the S1 byte. If the
quality level of the
clock source is the
same, the NE then
performs the protection
switching according to
the clock priority table.
That is, the NE selects
an unlocked clock
source that is of the
highest quality and
highest priority from all
the current available
clock sources as the
clock source to be
synchronized and
traced by the local
station.
l If the SSM protocol is
stopped, it indicates
that the S1 byte is not
used. The NE selects
and switches a clock
Related Tasks
A.11.2 Configuring Clock Subnets
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Subnet Configuration.
2. Click the Clock Quality tab.
Manual Setting of 0 Do Not Use For Do Not Use For This parameter specifies
Quality Level Synchronization Synchronization the clock quality whose
G.811 Reference Clock level is manually set to
zero.
Between G.811 Reference
Clock and G.812 Transit l Do Not Use For
Clock Synchronization: the
notification
G.812 Transit Clock information in the
Between G.812 Transit reverse direction of the
Clock and G.812 Local selected
Clock synchronization clock
G.812 Local Clock source to avoid direct
mutual locking of
Between G.812 Local adjacent NEs.
Clock and synchronous
equipment timing source l G.811 Reference
(SETS) Clock: the clock signal
specified in ITU-T G.
SETS Clock 811.
Between synchronous l Between G.811
equipment timing source Reference Clock and
(SETS) and quality G.812 Transit Clock:
unavailable lower than the quality
level of the clock signal
specified in ITU-T G.
811 but higher than the
quality level of the
transit exchange clock
signal specified in ITU-
T G.812.
l G.812 Transit Clock:
the transit exchange
clock signal specified
in ITU-T G.812.
l Between G.812 Transit
Clock and G.812 Local
Clock: lower than the
quality level of the
transit exchange clock
signal specified in ITU-
T G.812 but higher than
the quality level of the
local exchange clock
signal specified in ITU-
T G.812.
l G.812 Local Clock: the
local exchange clock
signal specified in ITU-
T G.812.
Related Tasks
A.11.3 Self-Defined Clock Quality
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Subnet Configuration.
2. Click the SSM Output Control tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.11.4 Configuring the SSM Output Status
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Subnet Configuration.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.11.5 Configuring the Clock ID Output Status
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Source Switching.
2. Click the Clock Source Reversion Parameter tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.11.8 Modifying the Recovery Parameter of the Clock Source
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Source Switching.
2. Click the Clock Source Switching tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Clock Source Switching Condition tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.11.7 Changing the Conditions for Clock Source Switching
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
2M Phase-Locked Shut Down Output Shut Down Output l This parameter is valid
Source Fail Action 2M Output S1 Byte only when 2M Phase-
Unavailable Locked Source Fail
Condition is not set to
Send AIS No Failure Condition.
l This parameter
specifies the operation
of the 2 Mbit/s phase-
locked loop (PLL)
when the 2 Mbit/s
phase-locked clock
source meets the failure
conditions.
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
Related Tasks
A.11.6 Modifying the Parameters of the Clock Output
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock
Synchronization Status.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Data Output Method in Normal Data Output Normal Data Output l When all the reference
Holdover Mode Mode Mode timing signals are lost,
Keep the Latest Data the slave clock changes
to the holdover mode.
At this time, the slave
clock works based on
the latest frequency
information stored
before the reference
timing signals are lost.
Then, the frequency of
the oscillator drifts
slowly to ensure that
the offset between the
frequency of the slave
clock and the reference
frequency is very
small. As a result, the
impact caused by the
drift is limited within
the specified
requirement.
l Normal Data Output
Mode: The slave clock
works based on the
latest frequency
information stored
before the reference
timing signals are lost,
and the holdover
duration depends on the
size of the phase-
locked clock register on
the equipment. The
holdover duration can
be up to 24 hours.
l Keep the Latest Data:
The slave clock works
in holdover mode all
the time based on the
latest frequency
information stored
before the reference
timing signals are lost.
Related Tasks
A.11.9 Querying the Clock Synchronization Status
Navigation Path
1. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Statistics Group tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.13.1 Browsing the Performance Data in the Statistics Group of an Ethernet Port
Navigation Path
1. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
2. Click the History Group tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History
Control Group.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Period Length(300 300 to 43200 900 l This parameter indicates or specifies the
to 43200 seconds, a monitoring period in Custom Period 1.
multiple of 30) l The value must be an integer multiple of
30.
Period Length(300 300 to 86400 86400 l This parameter indicates or specifies the
to 86400 seconds, a monitoring period in Custom Period 2.
multiple of 30) l The value must be an integer multiple of
30.
Related Tasks
A.13.3 Configuring a History Control Group
Navigation Path
l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
l Click the RMON Setting tab.
Object Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Event Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Threshold Detect Report All Report All l This parameter indicates or specifies the
Do Not Detect threshold detection method.
Report Only the l If the number of detected events reaches
Upper Threshold the preset threshold, the events are
reported to the NMS. Otherwise, the
Report Only the events are not reported to the NMS.
Lower Threshold
l If an event does not support this
parameter, Not Supported is displayed.
Related Tasks
A.13.2 Configuring an Alarm Group for an Ethernet Port
A.13.4 Browsing the Performance Data in the History Group of an Ethernet Port
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Bearer Type QinQ Link QinQ Link l Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Line
service.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction is
set to UNI-NNI.
Bearer Type 1 QinQ Link QinQ Link l Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Line
service.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction is
set to NNI-NNI.
Bearer Type 2 QinQ Link QinQ Link l Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Line
service.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction is
set to NNI-NNI.
Related Tasks
A.12.3.2 Configuring the E-Line Service
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab.
3. Click New.
NOTE
l The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item is
created. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified in
Sink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface.
l The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted from
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when the
other VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely.
l In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion of
VLAN IDs.
Related Tasks
A.12.3.3 Creating a VLAN Forwarding Table Item
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Parameters of NNIs
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.12.3.4 Configuring the E-LAN Service
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Related Tasks
A.12.4.1 Creating a Static MAC Address Entry
A.12.4.2 Creating a Blacklist Entry of MAC Addresses
A.12.4.3 Configuring the Aging Parameters of a MAC Address Table
A.12.4.4 Querying or Deleting a Dynamic MAC Address
A.12.5 Setting the Mode for Processing an Unknown Frame of the E-LAN Service
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Related Tasks
A.12.3.1 Configuring the QinQ Link
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protection > ERPS Management.
2. Click New.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.12.1.1 Creating Ethernet Ring Protection Instances
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.12.1.2 Setting the Parameters of Ethernet Ring Protocol
A.12.1.3 Querying the Status of the Ethernet Ring Protocol
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3. Click Create. The Create Port Group dialog box is displayed.
Related Tasks
A.12.8.1 Creating the MSTP Port Group
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3. On the main interface, select the port group to be configured.
4. Click Config. The Configure Port Group dialog box is displayed.
Related Tasks
A.12.8.7 Modifying the Configuration Data of the MSTP Port Group
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Bridge Parameters tab.
Bridge Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.12.8.2 Setting the Bridge Parameters of the MSTP
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.
Port Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.12.8.3 Setting the Parameters of the CIST
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the CIST Running Information tab.
Port Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.12.8.4 Querying the CIST Running Information
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Protocol Configuration tab.
Related Tasks
A.12.9.1 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Protocol
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Protocol Configuration tab.
3. Click Add.
Related Tasks
A.12.9.6 Adding a Quickly Deleted Port
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Router Port Management tab.
Related Tasks
A.12.9.2 Querying the Port Information of the Routers
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Router Port Management tab.
3.
4. Click New.
Related Tasks
A.12.9.4 Creating Static Router Ports
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Route Member Port Management tab.
Related Tasks
A.12.9.3 Querying the Information About the Multicast Groups
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Route Member Port Management tab.
3. Click New.
Related Tasks
A.12.9.5 Creating a Member of a Static Multicast Group
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Packet Statistics tab.
Related Tasks
A.12.9.7 Calculating IGMP Packets
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
3. Click New.
Load Sharing Hash Source MAC Source MAC l This parameter is valid
Algorithm Destination MAC only when Load
Sharing of a LAG is set
Source and Destination to Sharing.
MAC
l The load sharing
Source IP computation methods
Destination IP include: MAC address
Source and Destination IP specific allocation
(based on the source
MAC address,
destination MAC
address, and XOR
between source MAC
address and source
MAC address), IP
address specific
allocation (based on the
source IP address,
destination IP address,
and XOR between
source IP address and
source IP address).
Related Tasks
A.12.2.1 Creating a LAG
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port Priority tab.
Related Tasks
A.12.2.2 Setting Parameters for LAGs
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Related Tasks
A.12.13 LPT Configuration
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Port
Mirroring from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. The Port Mirror Management dialog box is displayed.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.
Related Tasks
A.12.11.1 Creating an MD
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created.
Choose New > New Maintenance Association.
Related Tasks
A.12.11.2 Creating an MA
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New >
New MEP Point.
Related Tasks
A.12.11.3 Creating an MEP Point
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote MEP Point
dialog box is displayed.
4. Click New.
Related Tasks
A.12.11.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the MIP Point tab.
3. Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.
Related Tasks
A.12.11.5 Creating an MIP
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test.
4. Choose OAM > Start LB.
Related Tasks
A.12.11.7 Performing an LB Test
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test.
4. Choose OAM > Start LT.
Related Tasks
A.12.11.8 Performing an LT Test
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OAM Parameter tab.
Related Tasks
A.12.12.1 Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function
A.12.12.2 Enabling the Link Event Notification
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.
Error Frame 1000 to 60000, in 1000 This parameter specifies the duration of
Monitor Window step of 100 monitoring error frames.
(ms)
Error Frame 1488 to 892800000, 892800000 This parameter specifies the window of
Period Window in step of 1 monitoring the error frame period.
(frame)
Error Frame 10 to 900, in step of 60 This parameter specifies the time window of
Second Window(s) 1 monitoring the error frame second.
Related Tasks
A.12.12.3 Modifying the OAM Error Frame Monitoring Threshold
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.
B.9.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.
NOTE
If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN 910 equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and
Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain.
The default DiffServ domain cannot be modified or deleted.
Related Tasks
A.12.10.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.
NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, Mapping
Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain. The
default DS domain cannot be modified and deleted.
Related Tasks
A.12.10.1 Creating a DS Domain
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.
2. Select the DS domain to be changed in the main interface.
3. Click the Apply Port tab.
4. Click Modify.
NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN 910, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation
Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain. The port applied
to the default DS domain cannot be modified.
Related Tasks
A.12.10.3 Changing the Ports That Use the DS Domain
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Grooming Police After SP CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP l The strict priority (SP)
Reloading WRR AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1: scheduling algorithm is
WRR designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the key
services is that higher
priorities are required
to minimize the
response delay in the
case of congestion
events.
l The weighted round
robin (WRR)
scheduling algorithm
divides each port into
multiple output sub-
queues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each sub-
queue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 910
supports the setting of
the SP+WRR
scheduling algorithm
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
scheduling algorithm
and the value of the SP
scheduling algorithm
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).
Related Tasks
A.12.10.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy
A.12.10.9 Querying the Port Policy
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the CoS Queue Configuration tab.
3. Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Grooming Police After SP CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP l The strict priority (SP)
Reloading WRR AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1: scheduling algorithm is
WRR designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the key
services is that higher
priorities are required
to minimize the
response delay in the
case of congestion
events.
l The weighted round
robin (WRR)
scheduling algorithm
divides each port into
multiple output sub-
queues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each sub-
queue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 910
supports the setting of
the SP+WRR
scheduling algorithm
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
scheduling algorithm
and the value of the SP
scheduling algorithm
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).
Related Tasks
A.12.10.4 Creating a Port Policy
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab.
3. Click New. The Create Traffic Classification dialog box is displayed.
Ingress Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Egress Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.12.10.6 Creating the Traffic
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Related Tasks
A.12.10.8 Configuring Port Shaping
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the General Attributes tab.
Related Tasks
A.12.6.1 Setting the General Attributes of Ethernet Ports
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Flow Control tab.
Related Tasks
A.12.6.2 Configuring the Traffic Control of Ethernet Ports
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
Ingress UNI Tagged frame The port receives the The port discards The port receives
frame. the frame. the frame.
Untagged frame The port discards the The ports add the The ports add the
frame. VLAN tag, to which VLAN tag, to which
Default VLAN ID Default VLAN ID
and VLAN and VLAN
Priority Priority
correspond, to the correspond, to the
frame and receive frame and receive
the frame. the frame.
Egress UNI Tagged frame The port transmits The port strips the l If the VLAN ID
the frame. VLAN tag from the in the frame is
frame and then Default VLAN
transmits the frame. ID, the port strips
the VLAN tag
from the frame
and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is not
Default VLAN
ID, the port
directly transmits
the frame.
Related Tasks
A.12.6.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Related Tasks
A.12.6.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Ports
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2. Click the General tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Dialling Mode Pulse Dual-Tone This parameter indicates the dialling mode
Dual-Tone Frequency of the orderwire phone.
Frequency
Related Tasks
A.18.1 Configuring the Orderwire
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Advanced tab.
Related Tasks
A.18.1 Configuring the Orderwire
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2. Click the F1 Data Port tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.18.2 Configuring the Synchronous Data Service
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab.
Related Tasks
A.18.3 Configuring the Asynchronous Data Service
Navigation Path
Select the AUX logical board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface
from the Function Tree.
Relay Control Auto Control Auto Control l Auto Control: If an alarm is reported, the
Mode Manual Control alarming relay is started up
automatically. Otherwise, the alarming
relay is shut down.
l Manual Control: Relay Status in Major
Alarm(K0) and Relay Status in Critical
Alarm(K1) need to be set.
Relay Status in Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status of
Major Alarm(K0) Enabled the relay is set manually for major alarms.
l Enable: The relay is set to the "0N" status
for major alarms.
l Disabled: The relay is set to the "OFF"
status for major alarms.
l This parameter is valid only when Relay
Control Mode is set to Manual
Control.
Relay Status in Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status of
Critical Alarm(K1) Enabled the relay is set manually for critical
alarms.
l Enable: The relay is set to the enabled
status for critical alarms.
l Disabled: The relay is set to the disabled
status for critical alarms.
l This parameter is valid only when Relay
Control Mode is set to Manual
Control.
Using Status Unused Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarm
Used interface of the input relay is used.
Alarm Mode Relay Turns Off/ Relay Turns Off/ l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns
High Level High Level Off/High Level, an alarm is generated
Relay Turns On/ when the relay is turned off.
Low Level l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns
On/Low Level, an alarm is generated
when the relay is turned on.
l This parameter is valid only when Using
Status is set to Used.
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Critical Alarm This parameter specifies the severity of the
Major Alarm alarm that is generated at the input relay.
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
Use or Not Unused Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarm
Used interface of the output relay is used.
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Critical Alarm This parameter indicates the severity of the
Major Alarm Major Alarm alarm.
Minor Alarm Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm Warning Alarm
Alarm Output CSK-1 CSK-1 This parameter specifies the channel of the
Channel CSK-2 output alarm relay.
CSK-3
CSK-4
Related Tasks
A.18.5 Configure External Alarms
Navigation Path
l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the IF Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Enable IEEE-1588 Enabled Disabled If the OptiX RTN 910 is interconnected with
Timeslotc Disabled the packet radio equipment, this parameter
should be set to Enabled. Otherwise, this
parameter should be set to Disabled.
NOTE
l a. The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support the 2M wayside service.
l b. The IFU2 and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function.
l c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.
Related Tasks
A.8.5 Setting IF Attributes
A.18.4 Configuring the Wayside E1 Service
Navigation Path
l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the ATPC Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
ATPC Upper -75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPC
Threshold(dBm) upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold to a value for the expected
ATPC Lower -35.0 to -90.0 -70.0 receive power.
Threshold(dBm)
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic Threshold
(dBm) is set to Disabled.
Related Tasks
A.8.6 Configuring the ATPC Attributes
Navigation Path
l In the NE Explorer, select a Hybrid IF board from the Object Tree and then choose
Configuration > Hybrid/AM Configuration from the Function Tree.
l Click the Hybrid/AM Configuration tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
AM Enable Status Disable Disable l When this parameter is set to Disable, the
Enable radio link uses only the specified
modulation scheme. In this case, you need
to select Manually Specified
Modulation Mode.
l When this parameter is set to Enable, the
radio link uses the corresponding
modulation scheme according to the
channel conditions.
Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the
reliable transmission of the E1 services and
provide bandwidth adaptively for the
Ethernet services when the AM function is
enabled.
Related Tasks
A.8.7 Setting the Hybrid/AM Attributes
A.8.11 Querying the AM Status
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.8.9 Querying the ATPC Adjustment Records
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Navigation Path
l Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.14.1 Setting the Transmit Frequency Attribute of the ODU
Navigation Path
l Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the Power Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Power to Be -90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l This parameter is used to set the expected
Received(dBm) receive power of the ODU and is mainly
used in the antenna alignment stage. After
this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU exceeds
the range of receive power ±3 dB, the
ODU LED of the IF board connected to
the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and
off for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating that
the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l When this parameter takes the default
value, the antenna misalignment
indicating function is disabled.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Related Tasks
A.14.3 Setting the Power Attributes of the ODU
Navigation Path
l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.14.2 Querying the ODU Attribute
Navigation Path
l Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.14.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of the ODU
Navigation Path
l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
NOTE
l a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box.
l b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.
Related Tasks
A.15 Setting the Parameters of SDH Ports
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Off Period(ms) 2000 to 300000 60000 This parameter indicates or specifies the
period when the laser does not work (with
the ALS function being enabled).
Continuously On- 2000 to 300000 90000 This parameter indicates or specifies the
test Period(ms) period when a shutdown laser is manually
started up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.
Navigation Path
l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select By Board/Port(Channel).
l Select Port from the list box.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Related Tasks
A.16 Setting the Parameters of PDH Ports
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port Mode Layer 2 Layer 2 This parameter indicates the working mode
of the Ethernet name.
Related Tasks
A.12.7.1 Setting the General Attributes of the IF_ETH Port
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
Tag Tag Aware Tag Aware l This parameter specifies the TAG flag of
Access a port. For details about the TAG flags
and associated frame-processing
Hybrid methods, see Table B-2.
l If all the accessed services are frames that
contain the VLAN tag (tagged frames),
set this parameter to "Tag Aware".
l If all the accessed services are frames that
do not contain the VLAN tag (untagged
frames), set this parameter to "Access".
l If the accessed services contain tagged
frames and untagged frames, set this
parameter to "Hybrid".
Ingress Port Tagged frame The port receives the The port discards The port receives
frame. the frame. the frame.
Untagged frame The port discards the The port receives The port receives
frame. the frame after the the frame after the
VLAN tag that VLAN tag that
corresponds to corresponds to
"Default VLAN ID" "Default VLAN ID"
and "VLAN and "VLAN
Priority" is added to Priority" is added to
the frame. the frame.
Egress Port Tagged frame The port transmits The port strips the l If the VLAN ID
the frame. VLAN tag from the in the frame is
frame and then "Default VLAN
transmits the frame. ID", the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is not
"Default VLAN
ID", the port
directly transmits
the frame.
Related Tasks
A.12.7.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of the IF_ETH Port
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback The IF port on the OptiX RTN 910 does not
support the setting of this parameter.
Related Tasks
A.12.7.3 Setting the Advanced Attributes of the IF_ETH Port
Navigation Path
1. Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead
Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.
2. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Display in Text Selected Selected This parameter specifies the display in the
Format Deselected text format.
Related Tasks
A.17.1 Configuring RSOHs
Navigation Path
1. Select SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.
2. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Display in Text Selected Selected This parameter specifies the display in the
Format Deselected text format.
Related Tasks
A.17.2 Configuring VC-4 POHs
Navigation Path
1. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function
Tree.
2. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Display in Text Selected Selected This parameter specifies the display in the
Format Deselected text format.
Related Tasks
A.17.3 Configuring VC-12 POHs
C Glossary
C.1 0-9
This section provides the terms starting with numbers.
C.2 A-E
This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
C.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
C.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
C.5 P-T
This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
C.6 U-Z
This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
C.1 0-9
This section provides the terms starting with numbers.
1+1 protection An architecture that has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection
SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. At the source end, the normal traffic signal is
permanently bridged to both the working and protection SNC/trail. At the sink end, the
normal traffic signal is selected from the better of the two SNCs/trails. Due to the
permanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected traffic
signal to be provided.
1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)
802.1Q in 802.1Q 802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ) is a VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLAN
tag to a tagged frame.The implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to a
frame with a private VLAN tag, making the frame encapsulated with two layers of VLAN
tags. The frame is forwarded over the service provider's backbone network based on the
public VLAN tag. By this, a layer 2 VPN tunnel is provided to customers.The QinQ
feature enables the transmission of the private VLANs to the peer end transparently.
C.2 A-E
This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
Administrative Unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer
and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order
VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to
the multiplex section frame start.
AGC See Automatic Gain Control
AM See adaptive modulation
Analog to Digital An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. The
Converter reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).
APS See Automatic Protection Switching
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol
ASK amplitude shift keying
ATPC See automatic transmit power control
AU See Administrative Unit
Automatic Gain A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as a
Control function of a specified parameter, such as received signal level.
Automatic Protection Automatic Protection Switching (APS) is the capability of a transmission system to
Switching detect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover the
traffic.
automatic transmit A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected
power control at the receiver
B
Base Station Controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks
with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides
the following functions: Radio resource management, Base station management, Power
control, Handover control, and Traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages
one or more BTSs in an actual network.
BER See Bit Error Rate
BIOS Basic Input Output System
BIP Bit-Interleaved Parity
bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding
bit in the received digital signal.
Bit Error Rate Bit error rate. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used
to measure the communications quality of a network.
BPDU See Bridge Protocol Data Unit
Bridge Protocol Data The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that
Unit uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on
ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was
intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
BSC See Base Station Controller
C
C-VLAN Customer VLAN
CAR See committed access rate
CBS See Committed Burst Size
CCDP See Co-Channel Dual Polarization
Central Processing The CPU is the brains of the computer. Sometimes referred to simply as the processor
Unit or central processor, the CPU is where most calculations take place.
CF See compact flash
CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol
CIR See Committed Information Rate
CIST See Common and Internal Spanning Tree
Class of Service A class object that stores the priority mapping rules. When network congestion occurs,
the class of service (CoS) first processes services by different priority levels from high
to low. If the bandwidth is insufficient to support all services, the CoS dumps the services
of low priority.
Co-Channel Dual A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical
Polarization polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice
the transmission capacity of the single polarization.
committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.
CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified
into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate
can be defined.
Committed Burst Size committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,
the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed
information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this
parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be
forwarded.
Committed The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal
Information Rate conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to
the leaky bucket.
Common and Internal Common and Internal Spanning Tree. The single Spanning Tree calculated by STP and
Spanning Tree RSTP together with the logical continuation of that connectivity through MST Bridges
and regions, calculatedby MSTP to ensure that all LANs in the Bridged Local Area
Network are simply and fully connected.
compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in
portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in
a standardized enclosure.
CoS See Class of Service
CPU See Central Processing Unit
CRC See Cyclic Redundancy Check
cross polarization A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate
interference the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.
cancellation
Cyclic Redundancy A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses
Check a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it
sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after
transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission
was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission
includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
Data Communication A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data
Network Communication Function (DCF).
Data Communications The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
Channel transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)
between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the
192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12
is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
DC See Direct Current
DC-C See DC-Return Common (with Ground)
DC-I See DC-Return Isolate (with Ground)
DC-Return Common A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
(with Ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-Return Isolate A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
(with Ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND
on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC See Data Communications Channel
DCN See Data Communication Network
Differentiated Services Differentiated Services CodePoint. A marker in the header of each IP packet using bits
Code Point 0-6 in the DS field. Routers provide differentiated classes of services to various service
streams/flows based on this marker. In other words, routers select corresponding PHB
according to the DSCP value.
digital modulation A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the
carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the
information can be transmitted by the carrier.
Direct Current Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or
change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.
Distance Vector Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol. The DVMRP protocol is an Internet
Multicast Routing gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense
Protocol mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing
datagrams with its neighbors.
DSCP See Differentiated Services Code Point
dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves
orthogonally polarized.
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
E
E-LAN Ethernet-LAN
ECC See Embedded Control Channel
Electro Magnetic Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or
Interference limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
electromagnetic Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications
compatibility equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic
environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional
electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
[NTIA]
Embedded Control An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data
Channel communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility
EMI See Electro Magnetic Interference
EPL See Ethernet Private Line
EPLAN See ethernet private lan service
equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for
the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.
ERPS See ethernet ring protection switching
ES-IS End System to Intermediate System
ethernet private lan An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a
service dedocated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or
MPLS server layer networks.
Ethernet Private Line A point-to-point interconnection between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing.
Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers.
ethernet ring protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies.
protection switching
ethernet virtual private An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared
lan service bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
ethernet virtual private An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared
line service bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute
European A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
C.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
F
Fast Ethernet A type of Ethernet with a maximum transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s. It complies with
the IEEE 802.3u standard and extends the traditional media-sharing Ethernet standard.
fast link pulse The likn pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.
FCS Frame Check Sequence
FD See frequency diversity
FE See Fast Ethernet
FEC See Forward Error Correction
Field Programmable A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
Gate Array (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the
PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also
overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the
limited number of gate arraies.
FIFO See First in First out
File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers
on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an
FTP client and the other an FTP server.
First in First out A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.
FLP See fast link pulse
Forward Error A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at
Correction the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission are corrected at the receive end.
FPGA See Field Programmable Gate Array
frequency diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain
frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then
performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
FTP See File Transfer Protocol
G
gateway network A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and
element the NM application layer
GE See Gigabit Ethernet
Generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is
to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router
to avoid packet discarding and congestion.
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
Gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.It
runs at 1000Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support
coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If
Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge
(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.
In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing
the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.
GNE See gateway network element
Graphical User A visual computer enviroment that represents programs, files, and options with graphical
Interface images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.
GTS See Generic traffic shaping
GUI See Graphical User Interface
IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages
and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner,
the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
indoor unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,
multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.
Institute of Electrical A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but
and Electronics boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,
Engineers electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
signal.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
signal.
Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) .IS-IS is a kind of Interior Gateway Protocol
Intermediate System (IGP), used within the ASs. It is a link status protocol using Shortest Path First (SPF)
algorithm to calculate the route.
International The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-
Electrotechnical governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards.
Commission
International ISO (International Organization for Standardization) is the world's largest developer and
Organization for publisher of International Standards.
Standardization
Internet Control ICMP belongs to the TCP/IP protocol suite. It is used to send error and control messages
Messages Protocol during the transmission of IP-type data packets.
Internet Group The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among
Management Protocol the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent
across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery
service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The
entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two
fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.
Internet Protocol A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications
Version 6 and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF).Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) is also called. It is a new version of the
Internet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The specifications and
standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force
(IETF).The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while
an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
IP See Internet Protocol
IPv6 See Internet Protocol Version 6
IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System
ISO See International Organization for Standardization
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector
C.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
L
LAG See link aggregation group
LAN See Local Area Network
LAPD Link Access Procedure on the D channel
LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH
layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits
and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the
second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
LB See Loopback
LCAS See Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LDPC Low-Density Parity Check code
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC clientcan treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
Link Capacity The Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) is designed to allow the dynamic
Adjustment Scheme provisioning of bandwidth, using VCAT, to meet customer requirements.
LMSP Linear Multiplex Section Protection
Local Area Network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
Loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors.
LPT Link State Path Through
M
MA See Maintenance Association
MAC See Medium Access Control
MADM Multi Add-Drop Multiplexer
Maintenance That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the
Association connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance
Entities.
Maintenance Domain The Maintenance Domain (MD) refers to the network or the part of the network for which
connectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.
Maintenance Point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.
Management A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It
Information Base comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as
routers and switches) in a network.
Maximum Transfer The MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) is the size of the largest datagram that can be
Unit sent over a network.
MBS Maximum Burst Size
MD See Maintenance Domain
MDI See Medium Dependent Interface
Mean Time To Repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
Medium Access A general reference to the low-level hardware protocols used to access a particular
Control network. The term MAC address is often used as a synonym for physical addresses.
Medium Dependent The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media
Interface transmission.
MEP Maintenance End Point
MIB See Management Information Base
MP See Maintenance Point
MSP See multiplex section protection
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTBF Mean Time Between Failure
MTTR See Mean Time To Repair
MTU See Maximum Transfer Unit
Multiple Spanning Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an
Tree Protocol algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed
as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided
in the loop network.The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and
multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded
in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
multiplex section A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
protection including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
N
N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection
channel.
NE See Network Element
Network Element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One
NE is at least equipped with one system control board which manages and monitors the
entire network element. The NE software runs on the system control board.
network management The network management system in charge of the operation, administration, and
system maintenance of a network.
Network Service Access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can
Point access OSI network services.
NLP Normal Link Pulse
NMS See network management system
NNI Network-to-Network Interface or Network Node Interface
non-gateway network A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be
element transferred by the gateway network element application layer.
non-GNE See non-gateway network element
NSAP See Network Service Access Point
O
OAM Operations, Administration and Maintenance
ODU See outdoor unit
Open Shortest Path A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's
First algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A
link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers
in the area.
Open Systems A standard or "reference model" (officially defined by the International Organization of
Interconnection Standards (ISO)) for how messages should be transmitted between any two points in a
telecommunication network. The reference model defines seven layers of functions that
take place at each end of a communication.
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.
OSI See Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF See Open Shortest Path First
outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency
conversion and amplification for RF signals.
C.5 P-T
This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
P
PDH See Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
Peak Information Rate Peak Information Rate . A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be
not less than the committed information rate.
PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode
PIM-SM See Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode
Q
QoS See Quality of Service
QPSK See Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
Quadrature Phase Shift Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) is a modulation method of data transmission
Keying through the conversion or modulation and the phase determination of the reference
signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses
four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these
phases, each QPSK character can perform two-bit coding and display the codes in Gray
code on graph with the minimum BER.
Quality of Service Quality of Service, which determines the satisfaction of a subscriber for a service. QoS
is influenced by the following factors applicable to all services: service operability,
service accessibility, service maintainability, and service integrity.
R
Radio Freqency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an
electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.
The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC
with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified
into such high-frequency current.
Radio Network A device used in the RNS to control the usage and integrity of radio resources.
Controller
Rapid Spanning Tree An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
Protocol convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
Received signal level The signal level at a receiver input terminal.
Received Signal The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the
Strength Indicator receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD
within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna
RF See Radio Freqency
RFC Request For Comment
RIP See Routing Information Protocol
RMON Remote Monitoring
RNC See Radio Network Controller
Routing Information Routing Information Protocol: A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP
Protocol protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and
destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing
information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.
RS Reed-Solomon encoding
RSL Received Signal Level
RSSI See Received Signal Strength Indicator
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RTN Radio Transmission Node
S
SD See space diversity
SDH See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SFP See Small Form-Factor Pluggable
Signal Noise Ratio The SNR or S/N (Signal to Noise Ratio) of the amplitude of the desired signal to the
amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the
logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).
Simple Network A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
Management Protocol the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
Small Form-Factor A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
Pluggable
SNC See SubNetwork Connection
SNCP See SubNetwork Connection Protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol
synchronous transport An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in the
module SDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields
organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 . The information is suitably
conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized
to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher
capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities
for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.
T
TCI Tag Control Information
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol
TDM See Time Division Multiplexing
Telecommunication The Telecommunications Management Network is a protocol model defined by ITU-T
Management Network for managing open systems in a communications network.An architecture for
management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and
administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services.
Time Division It is a multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time
Multiplexing slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3...), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time
slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted
over one channel.
TMN See Telecommunication Management Network
trail A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signals from the input of the
trail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring the integrality of the transferred
signals.
TransmissionControl The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
Protocol be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.
TU Tributary Unit
C.6 U-Z
This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
U
UDP See User Datagram Protocol
UNI See User Network Interface
User Datagram A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
Protocol datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP
to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable
connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,
delayed, or delivered out of order.UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,
the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is
received.
User Network Interface A type of ATM Forum specification that defines an interoperability standard for the
interface between ATM-based products (a router or an ATM switch) located in a private
network and the ATM switches located within the public carrier networks. Also used to
describe similar connections in Frame Relay networks.
V
VC See Virtual Container
VC-12 Virtual Container -12
VC-3 Virtual Container -3
VC-4 Virtual Container -4
VCG See virtual concatenation group
VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal
port of a data service processing board
virtual concatenation A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same
group virtual concatenation link
Virtual Container A Virtual Container is the information structure used to support path layer connections
in the SDH. It consists of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information
fields organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 μs.
Virtual Local Area A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical
Network network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated
with switched Ethernet.
Virtual Private The extension of a private network that encompasses encapsulated, encrypted, and
Network authenticated links across shared or public networks. VPN connections can provide
remote access and routed connections to private networks over the Internet.
VLAN See Virtual Local Area Network
Voice over IP An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice
information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form
in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the
public switched telephone network (PSTN).
VoIP See Voice over IP
VPN See Virtual Private Network
W
Wait to Restore Time A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault recovered - trail/connection can
be used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic
signal from.
X
XPD Cross-Polarization Discrimination
XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation